PRIMERGY RX300 S7 Server Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual - English

PRIMERGY RX300 S7

Server

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

March 2012

Comments… Suggestions… Corrections…

The User Documentation Department would like to know your opinion of this manual. Your feedback helps us optimize our documentation to suit your individual needs.

Feel free to send us your comments by e-mail to [email protected]

.

Certified documentation according to DIN EN ISO 9001:2008

To ensure a consistently high quality standard and user-friendliness, this documentation was created to meet the regulations of a quality management system which complies with the requirements of the standard

DIN EN ISO 9001:2008. cognitas. Gesellschaft für Technik-Dokumentation mbH www.cognitas.de

Copyright and Trademarks

Copyright © 2012 Fujitsu Technology Solutions GmbH.

All rights reserved.

Delivery subject to availability; right of technical modifications reserved.

All hardware and software names used are trademarks of their respective manufacturers.

– The contents of this manual may be revised without prior notice.

– Fujitsu assumes no liability for damages to third party copyrights or other rights arising from the use of any information in this manual.

– No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the prior written permission of Fujitsu.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, and Hyper V are trademarks or registered trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation in the USA and other countries.

Intel and Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the USA and other countries.

Before reading this manual

For your safety

This manual contains important information for safely and correctly using this product.

Carefully read the manual before using this product. Pay particular attention to the accompanying manual "Safety Notes and Regulations" and ensure these safety notes are understood before using the product. Keep this manual and the manual "Safety Notes and Regulations" in a safe place for easy reference while using this product.

Radio interference

This product is a "Class A" ITE (Information Technology Equipment). In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user may be required to take appropriate measures.

VCCI-A

Aluminum electrolytic capacitors

The aluminum electrolytic capacitors used in the product's printed circuit board assemblies and in the mouse and keyboard are limited-life components. Use of these components beyond their operating life may result in electrolyte leakage or depletion, potentially causing emission of foul odor or smoke.

As a guideline, in a normal office environment (25°C) operating life is not expected to be reached within the maintenance support period (5 years).

However, operating life may be reached more quickly if, for example, the product is used in a hot environment. The customer shall bear the cost of replacing replaceable components which have exceeded their operating life.

Note that these are only guidelines, and do not constitute a guarantee of trouble-free operation during the maintenance support period.

High safety use

This product has been designed and manufactured for general uses such as general office use, personal use, domestic use and normal industrial use. It has not been designed or manufactured for uses which demand an extremely high level of safety and carry a direct and serious risk to life or body if such safety cannot be ensured.

RX300 S7


These uses include control of nuclear reactions in nuclear power plants, automatic airplane flight control, air traffic control, traffic control in mass transport systems, medical devices for life support, and missile guidance control in weapons systems (hereafter, "high safety use"). Customers should not use this product for high safety use unless measures are in place for ensuring the level of safety demanded of such use. Please consult the sales staff of Fujitsu if intending to use this product for high safety use.

Measures against momentary voltage drop

This product may be affected by a momentary voltage drop in the power supply caused by lightning. To prevent a momentary voltage drop, use of an AC uninterruptible power supply is recommended.

(This notice follows the guidelines of Voltage Dip Immunity of Personal

Computer issued by JEITA, the Japan Electronics and Information Technology

Industries Association.)

Technology controlled by the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade

Control Law of Japan

Documents produced by Fujitsu may contain technology controlled by the

Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Control Law of Japan. Documents which contain such technology should not be exported from Japan or transferred to non-residents of Japan without first obtaining authorization in accordance with the above law.

Harmonic Current Standards

This product conforms to harmonic current standard JIS C 61000-3-2.

Only for the Japanese market: About SATA hard disk drives

The SATA version of this server supports hard disk drives with SATA / BC-SATA storage interfaces. Please note that the usage and operation conditions differ depending on the type of hard disk drive used.

Please refer to the following internet address for further information on the usage and operation conditions of each available type of hard disk drive:

http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/harddisk/


RX300

Only for the Japanese market:

I

Although described in this manual, some sections do not apply to the

Japanese market. These options and routines include:

– CSS (Customer Self Service)

RX300 S7



RX300

Contents

1

1.1

1.2

2

2.1

2.1.1

2.1.2

2.1.3

2.2

2.3

2.4

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Where to find which information? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Notational conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Before you start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Classification of procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Customer Replaceable Units (CRU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Upgrade and Repair Units (URU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Field Replaceable Units (FRU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Average task duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Tools you need at hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Documents you need at hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

3

3.1

3.2

3.3

3.4

3.5

Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

ENERGY STAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

CE conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

FCC Class A Compliance Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Environmental protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

4 Basic hardware procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

4.1

4.1.1

4.1.2

4.1.2.1

4.1.2.2

4.1.3

4.1.3.1

4.1.3.2

Using diagnostics information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Locating the defective server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Determining the error class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Global Error indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Customer Self Service (CSS) indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Locating the defective component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Local diagnostic indicators on the front . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Local diagnostic indicators on the system board . . . . . . . 60

RX300 S7


Contents

4.2

4.3

4.4

4.5

4.5.1

4.5.2

4.5.3

4.6

4.6.1

4.6.2

4.6.3

4.7

4.7.1

4.8

4.8.1

4.8.2

4.9

4.10

4.11

4.12

Opening the rack door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Shutting down the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Disconnecting power cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Extending/removing the server from the rack . . . . . . . . . 65

Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Extending the server out of the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Removing the server from the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Opening the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Removing the server cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Removing the air duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Installing the air duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Closing the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Mounting the server cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Mounting the server in the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Seating the server on the rack rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Sliding the server into the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Connecting the server to the mains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Switching on the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Concluding software tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Closing the rack door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

5

5.1

5.1.1

5.1.2

5.1.2.1

5.1.2.2

5.1.3

5.1.4

5.1.5

5.1.6

5.2

5.2.1

5.2.1.1

5.2.1.2

Basic software procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Starting the maintenance task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Disabling BitLocker functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Viewing boot watchdog settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Configuring boot watchdog settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Removing backup and optical disk media . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Verifying and configuring the backup software solution . . . . . . 86

Note on server maintenance in a Multipath I/O environment . . . 87

Switching on the ID indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Completing the maintenance task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Updating or recovering the system board BIOS and iRMC . . . . 90

Updating or recovering the system board BIOS . . . . . . . . 90

Updating or recovering the iRMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92


RX300

Contents

6

6.1

6.1.1

6.1.2

6.1.3

6.1.4

6.1.5

6.2

6.2.1

6.2.2

6.2.3

6.2.4

6.2.5

5.2.2

5.2.3

5.2.4

5.2.5

5.2.6

5.2.6.1

Verifying system information backup / restore . . . . . . . . . . 94

Updating RAID controller firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Enabling Option ROM scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Verifying and configuring the backup software solution . . . . . 97

Resetting the boot retry counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Viewing the boot retry counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

5.2.6.2

5.2.7

5.2.8

5.2.9

Resetting the boot retry counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality . . . . . . . . . . 100

Enabling replaced components in the system BIOS . . . . . . . 101

Verifying the memory mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

5.2.10

Verifying the system time settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

5.2.11

Viewing and clearing the System Event Log (SEL) . . . . . . . 103

5.2.11.1

Viewing the SEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

5.2.11.2

Clearing the SEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

5.2.12

Updating the NIC configuration file in a Linux environment . . . 104

5.2.13

Enabling BitLocker functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

5.2.14

Performing a RAID array rebuild . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

5.2.15

Looking up changed MAC / WWN addresses . . . . . . . . . . 107

5.2.15.1

5.2.15.2

Looking up MAC addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Looking up WWN addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

5.2.16

Using the Chassis ID Prom Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

5.2.17

Configuring LAN teaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

5.2.17.1

5.2.17.2

After replacing / upgrading LAN controllers . . . . . . . . . 109

After replacing the system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

5.2.18

Switching off the ID indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

5.2.19

Specifying the chassis model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Installing PSU modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Removing a PSU dummy module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Installing a PSU module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Removing PSU modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117


Removing a PSU module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Installing a PSU dummy module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119


RX300 S7


Contents

6.3

6.3.1

6.3.2

6.3.3

6.3.4

6.3.5

6.4

6.4.1

6.4.2

6.4.3

6.4.4

6.4.5

6.5

6.5.1

6.5.2

6.5.3

6.5.4

6.5.5

6.5.6

6.5.7

Replacing PSU modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120


Removing the defective PSU module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Installing the new PSU module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121


Upgrading PSU from 450 W to 800 W . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122


Removing the PSU module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Installing the new PSU module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123


Replacing the power backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124


Disconnecting power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Removing the power backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Installing the power backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Reconnecting power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130


7

7.1

7.2

7.2.1

7.2.2

7.2.2.1

7.2.2.2

7.2.2.3

7.2.2.4

7.2.2.5

7.2.3

7.2.3.1

7.2.3.2

7.2.3.3

7.2.3.4

7.2.3.5

7.2.4

7.2.4.1

Hard disk drives / solid state drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Basic procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

3.5-inch hard disk drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Mounting order for 3.5-inch HDDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Installing 3.5-inch HDD modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Removing a 3.5-inch HDD dummy module . . . . . . . . . 134

Installing a 3.5-inch HDD module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Removing 3.5-inch HDD modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136


Removing a 3.5-inch HDD module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Installing a 3.5-inch HDD dummy module . . . . . . . . . . 138


Replacing a 3.5-inch HDD module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139


RX300

Contents

7.2.4.2

7.2.4.3

7.2.4.4

7.2.4.5

7.3

7.3.1

7.3.2

7.3.2.1

7.3.2.2

7.3.2.3

7.3.2.4

7.3.2.5

7.3.3

7.3.3.1

7.3.3.2

7.3.3.3

7.3.3.4

7.3.3.5

7.3.4

7.3.4.1

7.3.4.2

7.3.4.3

7.3.4.4

7.3.4.5

7.4

7.4.1

7.4.1.1

7.4.1.2

7.4.1.3

7.4.1.4

7.4.1.5

7.4.2

7.4.2.1

7.4.2.2

7.4.2.3

7.4.2.4

7.4.2.5

7.4.2.6

7.4.2.7

7.4.3

7.4.3.1

Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Removing a 3.5-inch HDD module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Installing a 3.5-inch HDD module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

2.5-inch hard disk drives / solid state drives . . . . . . . . . 140

Mounting order for 2.5-inch HDDs / SSDs . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Installing 2.5-inch HDD / SSD modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145


Removing a 2.5-inch HDD / SSD dummy module . . . . . . 146

Installing a 2.5-inch HDD / SSD module . . . . . . . . . . . 147


Removing 2.5-inch HDD / SSD modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148


Removing a 2.5-inch HDD / SSD module . . . . . . . . . . 149

Installing a 2.5-inch HDD / SSD dummy module . . . . . . . 151


Replacing a 2.5-inch HDD / SSD module . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152


Removing a 2.5-inch HDD / SSD module . . . . . . . . . . 153

Installing a 2.5-inch HDD / SSD module . . . . . . . . . . . 153


Replacing SAS / SATA HDD / SSD backplanes . . . . . . . . 153

Replacing the 3.5-inch HDD SAS / SATA backplane . . . . . . 153

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153


Removing the 3.5-inch HDD SAS / SATA backplane . . . . 155

Installing the 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane . . . . . . . . . 157


Replacing the 4x 2.5-inch HDD SAS backplane . . . . . . . . . 159

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159


Removing the HDD cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Removing the 4x 2.5-inch SAS HDD backplane . . . . . . . 162

Installing the 4x 2.5-inch HDD SAS backplane . . . . . . . 163

Installing the HDD cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164


Replacing the 12x 2.5-inch HDD SAS backplane . . . . . . . . 165

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

RX300 S7


Contents

7.4.3.2

7.4.3.3

7.4.3.4

7.4.3.5


Removing the 12x2.5-inch HDD SAS backplane . . . . . . 167

Installing the 12x 2.5-inch HDD SAS backplane . . . . . . 168


8

8.1

8.1.1

8.1.2

8.1.3

8.1.4

8.1.5

8.2

8.2.1

8.2.2

8.2.3

8.2.4

8.2.5

8.2.6

System fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Replacing the fan module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172


Removing a fan module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Installing a fan module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173


Removing the fan box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174


Removing fan module 2 and 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Removing the fan box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Installing the fan box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177


9

9.1

9.2

9.2.1

9.2.1.1

9.2.1.2

9.2.1.3

9.2.1.4

9.2.1.5

9.2.1.6

9.2.1.7

9.2.2

9.2.2.1

9.2.2.2

9.2.2.3

9.2.2.4

9.2.2.5

Expansion cards and backup units . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Expansion cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Installing expansion cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183


Removing PCI slot bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Installing an expansion card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Connecting cables to the expansion card . . . . . . . . . . 186

Connecting a battery backup unit to the expansion card . . 186


Removing expansion cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188


Removing an expansion card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Installing a PCI slot bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190



RX300

Contents

9.2.3

9.2.3.1

9.2.3.2

9.2.3.3

9.2.3.4

9.2.3.5

9.2.3.6

9.2.3.7

9.3

9.3.1

9.3.1.1

9.3.1.2

9.3.1.3

9.3.1.4

9.3.1.5

9.3.1.6

9.3.1.7

9.3.2

9.3.2.1

9.3.2.2

9.3.2.3

9.3.2.4

9.3.3

9.3.3.1

9.3.3.2

9.3.3.3

9.3.3.4

9.3.3.5

9.3.3.6

9.3.3.7

9.4

9.4.1

9.4.1.1

9.4.1.2

9.4.1.3

9.4.1.4

9.4.1.5

9.4.1.6

9.4.1.7

9.4.2

9.4.2.1

Replacing expansion cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191


Removing an expansion card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Installing an expansion card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192


Connecting a battery backup unit to the expansion card . . . 193


SAS RAID controller in PCI slot 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Installing the SAS RAID controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195


Preparing the SAS RAID controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Installing the SAS RAID controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196


Connecting a backup unit to the expansion card . . . . . . . 197


Removing the SAS RAID controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199


Removing the SAS RAID controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200


Replacing the SAS RAID controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201


Removing the defective SAS RAID controller . . . . . . . . 202

Installing the new SAS RAID controller . . . . . . . . . . . 202


Connecting a backup unit to the expansion card . . . . . . . 203


Modular LAN controller in PCI slot 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Installing the Modular LAN controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204


Preparing the Modular LAN controller . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Removing PCI slot bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Installing the Modular LAN controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208


Concluding software tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Removing the Modular LAN controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

RX300 S7


Contents

9.5

9.5.1

9.5.1.1

9.5.1.2

9.5.1.3

9.5.1.4

9.5.1.5

9.5.2

9.5.2.1

9.5.2.2

9.5.2.3

9.5.2.4

9.5.3

9.5.3.1

9.5.3.2

9.5.3.3

9.5.3.4

9.5.3.5

9.5.3.6

9.6

9.6.1

9.6.1.1

9.6.1.2

9.6.1.3

9.6.1.4

9.6.1.5

9.6.1.6

9.6.2

9.6.2.1

9.6.2.2

9.6.2.3

9.4.2.2

9.4.2.3

9.4.2.4

9.4.2.5

9.4.3

9.4.3.1

9.4.3.2

9.4.3.3

9.4.3.4

9.4.3.5


Removing the Modular LAN controller . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Installing a PCI slot bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215


Replacing the Modular LAN controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217


Removing the Modular LAN controller . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Installing the Modular LAN controller . . . . . . . . . . . . 218


Battery Backup Units (BBU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Installing a BBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220


Preparing the BBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Installing the BBU holder onto the air duct . . . . . . . . . 222


Removing a BBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226


Removing the BBU holder from the air duct . . . . . . . . . 227


Replacing a BBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229


Removing a BBU from the air duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Removing the BBU from the BBU holder . . . . . . . . . . 230

Installing a new BBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231


Flash Backup Units (FBU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Installing a FBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233


Preparing the SAS RAID controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Preparing the FBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Installing the FBU holder onto the air duct . . . . . . . . . 238


Removing a FBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240


Removing the FBU holder from the air duct . . . . . . . . . 241


RX300

Contents

9.6.2.4

9.6.3

9.6.3.1

9.6.3.2

9.6.3.3

9.6.3.4

9.6.3.5

9.6.3.6

9.7

9.7.1

9.7.1.1

9.7.1.2

9.7.1.3

9.7.1.4

9.7.1.5

9.7.2

9.7.2.1

9.7.2.2

9.7.2.3


Replacing a FBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243


Removing a FBU from the air duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Removing the FBU from the FBU holder . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Installing a new BBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245


Additional tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Mounting expansion card slot brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

General instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Network adapter D2735 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248



Handling SFP+ transceiver modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Installing SFP+ transceiver modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Removing an SFP+ transceiver module . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Replacing SFP+ transceiver modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

10 Main memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

10.1

Basic procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

10.1.1

Memory sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

10.1.1.1

10.1.1.2

10.1.1.3

10.1.1.4

Population rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Independant Channel mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Mirrored Channel and Performance modes . . . . . . . . . 267

Rank Sparing mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

10.2

Installing memory modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

10.2.1

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

10.2.2


10.2.3

Installing a memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

10.2.4


10.3

Removing memory modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

10.3.1

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

10.3.2


10.3.3

Removing a memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

10.3.4


10.4

Replacing memory modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

RX300 S7


Contents

10.4.1

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

10.4.2


10.4.3

Removing a memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

10.4.4

Installing a memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

10.4.5


11 Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

11.1


11.1.1

Supported processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

11.1.2

Processor locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

11.2

Installing processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

11.2.1

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

11.2.2


11.2.3

Installing the processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

11.2.3.1

Opening the load plate of the processor socket . . . . . . . 284

11.2.3.2

11.2.3.3

11.2.3.4

Installing the processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Removing the protective socket cover . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Closing th load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

11.2.4


11.3

Removing processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

11.3.1

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

11.3.2


11.3.3

Removing a processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

11.3.3.1

11.3.3.2

Opening the cover plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Removing the processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

11.3.3.3

11.3.3.4

11.3.3.5

Closing the load plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Installing the protective cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Closing the load plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

11.3.4


11.4

Upgrading or replacing processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

11.4.1

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

11.4.2


11.4.3

Upgrading or replacing a processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

11.4.3.1

11.4.3.2

Removing the processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Installing the processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

11.4.4


11.5

Handling processor heat sinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

11.5.1

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316


RX300

Contents

11.5.2


11.5.3

Installing processor heat sinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

11.5.3.1

Preparing the heat sink and processor . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

11.5.3.2

Installing the heat sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

11.5.4

Removing processor heat sinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

11.5.5

Replacing processor heat sinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

11.5.5.1

11.5.5.2

Removing the processor heat sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Applying thermal paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

11.5.5.3

Installing the processor heat sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

11.5.6


11.6

Applying thermal paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

12 Accessible drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

12.1

Basic informations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

12.2

Installing a Local Service Display (LSD) module . . . . . . . 330

12.2.1

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

12.2.2


12.2.3

Removing the LSD dummy cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

12.2.4

Installing a LSD module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

12.2.5


12.3

Removing a LSD module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

12.3.1

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

12.3.2


12.3.3

Removing the LSD module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

12.3.4


12.4

Replacing a LSD module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

12.4.1

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

12.4.2


12.4.3

Removing the defective LSD module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

12.4.4

Installing the new LSD moduleI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

12.4.5


12.5

Installing the optical disk drive (ODD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

12.5.1

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

12.5.2


12.5.3

Removing the ODD dummy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

12.5.4

Preparing an ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

12.5.5

Installing an ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

12.5.6


RX300 S7


Contents

12.6

Removing the optical disc drive (ODD) . . . . . . . . . . . 344

12.6.1

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

12.6.2


12.6.3

Removing the ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

12.6.4


12.7

Replacing an ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

12.7.1

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

12.7.2


12.7.3

Removing the defective ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

12.7.4

Installing the new ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

12.7.5


12.8

Installing an RDX/DAT drive in 3.5-inch version . . . . . . . 351

12.8.1

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

12.8.2


12.8.3

Installing an RDX/DAT drive in the cage . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

12.8.4

Installing the RDX/DAT drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

12.8.5


12.9

Removing an RDX/DAT drive in 3.5-inch version . . . . . . 355

12.9.1

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

12.9.2


12.9.3

Removing the drive cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

12.9.4

Removing an RDX/DAT drive out of the cage . . . . . . . . . 358

12.9.5


12.10

Replacing the RDX/DAT drive in 3.5-inch version . . . . . . 360

12.10.1

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

12.10.2


12.10.3

Removing the defective RDX/DAT drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

12.10.4

Installing the new RDX/DAT drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

12.10.5


12.11

Installing an RDX/DAT drive in 2.5-inch version . . . . . . . 362

12.11.1

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

12.11.2


12.11.3

Installing an RDX/DAT drive in the cage . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

12.11.4

Installing the RDX/DAT drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

12.11.5


12.12

Removing an RDX/DAT drive in 2.5-inch version . . . . . . 367

12.12.1

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

12.12.2


12.12.3



RX300

Contents

12.12.4

Removing an RDX/DAT drive out of the cage . . . . . . . . . . 369

12.12.5


12.13

Replacing the RDX/DAT drive in 2.5-inch version . . . . . . 372

12.13.1

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

12.13.2


12.13.3

Removing the defective RDX/DAT drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

12.13.4

Installing the new RDX/DAT drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

12.13.5


12.14

Installing an LTO drive in 2.5-inch version . . . . . . . . . . 374

12.14.1

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

12.14.2


12.14.3


12.14.4

Removing the tape dummy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

12.14.5

Installing an LTO drive in the cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

12.14.6

Installing the LTO cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

12.14.7


12.15

Removing an LTO drive in 2.5-inch version . . . . . . . . . 383

12.15.1

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

12.15.2


12.15.3


12.15.4

Removing an LTO drive out of the cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

12.15.5

Installing the dummy drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

12.15.6


12.16

Replacing the LTO drive in 2.5-inch version . . . . . . . . . 390

12.16.1

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

12.16.2


12.16.3

Removing the defective LTO drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

12.16.4

Installing the new LTO drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

12.16.5


13 Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

13.1

Replacing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

13.1.1

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

13.1.2


13.1.3

Removing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

13.1.4

Installing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

13.1.5


13.2

Front VGA connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

RX300 S7


Contents

13.2.1

Installing the front VGA connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

13.2.1.1

13.2.1.2

13.2.1.3

13.2.1.4

13.2.1.5

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403


Removing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

Preparing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

Installing the front VGA connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

13.2.1.6

13.2.1.7

Re-installing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406


13.2.2

Removing the front VGA connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

13.2.2.1

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

13.2.2.2

13.2.2.3

13.2.2.4


Removing the front VGA cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

Removing the front VGA connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

13.2.2.5

13.2.2.6



13.2.3

Replacing the front VGA connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

13.2.3.1

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

13.2.3.2


13.2.3.3

13.2.3.4

13.2.3.5

13.2.3.6

13.2.3.7


Removing the front VGA connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Installing the new front VGA connector . . . . . . . . . . . 411



13.3

Front LAN connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

13.3.1

Installing the front LAN connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

13.3.1.1

13.3.1.2

13.3.1.3

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412



13.3.1.4

13.3.1.5

13.3.1.6

13.3.1.7

Preparing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

Installing the front LAN connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414



13.3.1.8

Using the front management LAN connector . . . . . . . . 422

13.3.2

Removing the front LAN connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

13.3.2.1

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

13.3.2.2

13.3.2.3

13.3.2.4

13.3.2.5


Removing the front LAN board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

Removing the front LAN connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426


13.3.3

Replacing the front LAN connector and board . . . . . . . . . 430

13.3.3.1

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430


RX300

Contents

13.3.3.2

13.3.3.3

13.3.3.4

13.3.3.5

13.3.3.6

13.3.3.7



Removing the front LAN connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431

Installing the new front LAN connector . . . . . . . . . . . . 431



13.4

Front cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

13.4.1

Removing the front panel cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

13.4.1.1

13.4.1.2

13.4.1.3

13.4.1.4

13.4.1.5

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432


Removing the front panel cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

Re-installing the front panel cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434


14 System board and components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

14.1

Replacing the CMOS battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

14.1.1

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440

14.1.2


14.1.3

Removing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

14.1.4

Installing the CMOS battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442

14.1.5


14.2

USB Flash Module (UFM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

14.2.1

Installing the UFM board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

14.2.1.1

14.2.1.2

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444


14.2.1.3

14.2.1.4

14.2.1.5

Installing the UFM board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445


Software configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

14.2.2

Removing the UFM board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

14.2.2.1

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

14.2.2.2

14.2.2.3

14.2.2.4


Removing the UFM board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449


14.2.3

Replacing the UFM board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

14.2.3.1

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

14.2.3.2

14.2.3.3


Removing the UFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

14.2.3.4

14.2.3.5

Re-installing the UFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452


RX300 S7

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 21

Contents

14.2.3.6

Software configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

14.3

Trusted Platform Module (TPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

14.3.1

Installing the TPM board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

14.3.1.1

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

14.3.1.2

14.3.1.3


Installing the TPM board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

14.3.1.4


14.3.2

Removing the TPM board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

14.3.2.1

14.3.2.2

14.3.2.3

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462


Removing the TPM board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

14.3.2.4


14.3.3

Replacing the TPM board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

14.3.3.1

14.3.3.2

14.3.3.3

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467


Removing the TPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468

14.3.3.4

14.3.3.5

Re-installing the TPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469


14.4

Onboard SKU key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

14.4.1

Installing the onboard SKU key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

14.4.1.1

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

14.4.1.2

14.4.1.3


Installing the onboard SKU key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471

14.4.1.4


14.4.2

Removing the onboard SKU key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

14.4.2.1

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

14.4.2.2

14.4.2.3


Removing onboard SKU key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

14.4.2.4


14.4.3

Replacing the onboard SKU key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474

14.4.3.1

14.4.3.2

14.4.3.3

14.4.3.4

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474


Replacing the onboard SKU key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475


14.5

Replacing the system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475

14.5.1

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

14.5.2


14.5.3

Removing the system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479

14.5.4

Installing the system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481

14.5.4.1

Mounting the system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481

14.5.4.2

Swapping processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483

22 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

RX300

Contents

14.5.5


15 Conversion configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487

15.1


15.1.1

Supported conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487

15.1.2

SAS cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

15.2

Basic Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

15.2.1

Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

15.2.2


15.2.3

Removing the front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

15.2.4

Removing HDD cages and front panel cage . . . . . . . . . . 491

15.2.5

Installing HDD cage and front panel cage . . . . . . . . . . . . 492

15.2.6

Installing the front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493

15.2.6.1

15.2.6.2

Large front panel cage in bay 4/5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493

Small front panel cage in bay 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494

15.3

Converting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495

15.3.1

Configuration 2 to configuration 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495

15.3.2


15.3.3


15.3.4


15.3.4.1

Replacing the front cages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505

15.3.5


15.3.6


15.3.7


15.4

Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

16 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513

16.1

Cables overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513

16.2

Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516

16.2.1

Configuration 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516

16.2.2

Configuration 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

16.2.3

Configuration 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518

16.2.4

Configuration 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519

16.2.5

Configuration 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520

16.2.6

Configuration 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521

16.2.7

Configuration 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522

16.2.8

Configuration 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523

RX300 S7


Contents

17 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525

17.1

Mechanical overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525

17.1.1

Server front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525

17.1.2

Server rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528

17.1.3

Server interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529

17.2

Configuration tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530

17.2.1

Hard disk drives / solid state drives mounting order . . . . . . 530

17.2.2

Memory board configuration table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530

17.2.3

Expansion card configuration table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530

17.3

Connectors and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

17.3.1

Connectors and indicators on the system board . . . . . . . . 531

17.3.1.1

Onboard connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

17.3.1.2

Onboard settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533

17.3.1.3

Onboard indicators and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535

17.3.2

Connectors and indicators on the I/O panel . . . . . . . . . . 537

17.3.2.1

17.3.2.2

I/O panel connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537

I/O panel indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538

17.3.3

Connectors and indicators on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . 540

17.3.3.1

17.3.3.2

Front panel connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540

Front panel controls and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541

17.4

Minimum startup configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544


RX300

Version history

Issue number

1.0 / January 2012

1.1 / March 2012

Reason for update

Initial release

Updated and revised release

RX300 S7



RX300

1 Introduction

This Upgrade and Maintenance Manual provides instructions for the following procedures:

●

●

Upgrading the server configuration by adding optional hardware components

Upgrading the server configuration by replacing existing hardware components with superior ones.

●

Replacing defective hardware components

This manual focuses on on-site maintenance tasks. It is recommended to prepare each service assignment following remote diagnostics procedures, as described in the "ServerView Suite Local Service Concept (LSC)" manual.

I

The "ServerView Suite Local Service Concept (LSC)" manual is available from the ServerView Suite DVD 2 supplied with your

PRIMERGY server or online at

http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com

(EMEA market) or

http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/manual/

(Japanese market).

This manual is included on your ServerView Suite DVD 2 or available from the

Fujitsu Technology Solutions manuals server at


.

For the Japanese market please use the following URL:


V

CAUTION!

The document at hand comprises procedures of a wide range of complexity. Check the profile of qualification for technicians before assigning tasks. Before you start, carefully read

"Classification of procedures" on page 33

.

RX300 S7


Introduction

1.1

Where to find which information?

While the Upgrade and Maintenance Manual focuses on upgrade and maintenance procedures to bring the server back to normal operation, additional manuals provide detailed background information on server components and BIOS settings.

For information on documents you need to have with you when leaving for maintaining a server see

"Documents you need at hand" on page 39 .

I

PRIMERGY manuals are available in PDF format on the

ServerView Suite DVD 2. The ServerView Suite DVD 2 is part of the

ServerView Suite supplied with every server.

If you no longer have the ServerView Suite DVDs, you can obtain the relevant current versions using the order number U15000-C289 (the order number for the Japanese market: please refer to the configurator of the server

http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/system/

).

The PDF files of the manuals can also be downloaded free of charge from the Internet. The overview page showing the online documentation available on the Internet can be found using the URL (for EMEA market):


. The PRIMERGY server documentation can be accessed using the Industry standard servers navigation option.

For the Japanese market:

Please refer to the following URL for the latest product manuals:


Before using the product, please check for additional information that may be available under the following URL:

http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/products/note/


RX300

Introduction

1.2

Notational conventions

The following notational conventions are used in this manual:

Text in italics

fixed font indicates commands or menu items indicates system output indicates text to be entered by the user

semi-bold fixed font

"Quotation marks" indicate names of chapters and terms that are being emphasized

Ê describes activities that must be performed in the order shown

[Abc] indicates keys on the keyboard

V

CAUTION!

Pay particular attention to texts marked with this symbol!

Failure to observe this warning may endanger your life, destroy the system or lead to the loss of data.

I indicates additional information, notes and tips indicates the procedure category in terms of complexity

and qualification requirements, see "Classification of procedures" on page 33

indicates the average task duration, see "Average task duration" on page 36

RX300 S7


Introduction


RX300

2 Before you start

Before you start any upgrade or maintenance task, please proceed as follows:

Ê

Carefully read the safety instructions in chapter "Important information" on page 41 .

Ê

Make sure that all necessary manuals are available. Refer to the documentation overview in section

"Documents you need at hand" on page 39 . Print the PDF files if required.

Ê

Make yourself familiar with the procedure categories introduced in section

"Classification of procedures" on page 33 .

Ê

Ensure that all required tools are available according to section

"Tools you need at hand" on page 37 .

Installing optional components

The "PRIMERGY RX300 S7 Server Operating manual" gives an introduction to server features and provides an overview of available hardware options.

Use the Fujitsu ServerView Suite management software to prepare hardware expansions. ServerView Suite documentation is available online at


(


for the Japanese market) or from the ServerView Suite DVD 2 supplied with your PRIMERGY server. Please refer to the following ServerView Suite topics:

– Operation

– Virtualization

– Maintenance

I

For the latest information on hardware options, refer to your server’s hardware configurator available online at the following address: for the EMEA market:

http://ts.fujitsu.com/products/standard_servers/rack/primergy_rx300s7.html

for the Japanese market:


Please contact your local Fujitsu customer service partner for details on how to order expansion kits or spare parts. Use the Fujitsu Illustrated Spares Catalog to identify the required spare part and obtain technical data and order information. Illustrated Spares catalogs are available online at

http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com/illustrated_spares

(EMEA market only).

RX300 S7


Before you start

Replacing a defective component

The global error indicators on the front and rear sides of the server as well as local diagnostic LEDs on the front panel report defective hardware components that need to be replaced. For further information on the controls and indicators of your server, refer to the "PRIMERGY RX300 S7 Server Operating Manual" and section

"Connectors and indicators" on page 531

.

If the system has been powered off in order to replace a non-hot plug unit, a system of PRIMERGY diagnostic indicators guides you to the defective component. The "Indicate CSS" button enables the indicator next to the defective component even if the server has been switched off and disconnected from the mains. For further information, please refer to sections

"Using diagnostics information" on page 53

and "Connectors and indicators on the front panel" on page 540 .

If the defective component is a customer replaceable unit included in the CSS concept (Customer Self Service, only available for EMEA market), the CSS indicators on the front and rear side of the server will light up.

For further information, refer to the "ServerView Suite Local Service Concept

(LSC)" manual available from the ServerView Suite DVD 2 supplied with your



(EMEA market) or


(Japanese market).

It is recommended to prepare local maintenance tasks using remote diagnostics procedures, as described in the "ServerView Suite Local Service Concept

(LSC)" manual.


RX300


2.1

Classification of procedures

The complexity of maintenance procedures varies significantly. Procedures have been assigned to one of three unit categories, indicating the level of difficulty and required qualification.

At the beginning of each procedure, the involved unit type is indicated by one of the symbols introduced in this section.

I

Please ask your local Fujitsu service center for more detailed information.

2.1.1

Customer Replaceable Units (CRU)


Customer Replaceable Units are intended for customer self service and may be installed or replaced as hot-plug components during operation.

I

Components that the customer is entitled to replace may differ according to the service form in his country.

Hot-plug components increase system availability and guarantee a high degree of data integrity and fail-safe performance. Procedures can be carried out without shutting down the server or going offline.

Components that are handled as Customer Replaceable Units

– Hot-plug power supply units

– Hot-plug fan modules

– Hot-plug HDD / SSD modules

Peripherals that are handled as Customer Replaceable Units

– Keyboard

– Mouse

RX300 S7



2.1.2

Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)


Upgrade and Repair Units are non hot-plug components that can be ordered separately to be installed as options (Upgrade Units) or are available to the customer through customer self service (Repair Units).

I

Server management error messages and diagnostic indicators on the front panel and system board will report defective Upgrade and Repair

Units as customer replaceable CSS components.

Upgrade and repair procedures involve shutting down and opening the server.

V

CAUTION!

The device may be seriously damaged or cause damage if it is opened without authorization or if repairs are attempted by unauthorized and untrained personnel.

Components that are handled as Upgrade Units

– Processors (upgrade kits)

– Optical disk drives

– Backup drives

– Expansion cards

– Battery backup units

– Memory modules

Components that are handled solely as Repair Units

– CMOS battery

– Non hot-plug fans

– Non hot-plug hard disk drives


RX300


2.1.3

Field Replaceable Units (FRU)


Removing and installing Field Replaceable Units involves complex maintenance procedures on integral server components. Procedures will require shutting down, opening and disassembling the server.

V

CAUTION!

Maintenance procedures involving Field Replaceable Units must be performed exclusively by Fujitsu service personnel or technicians trained by Fujitsu. Please note that unauthorized interference with the system will void the warranty and exempt the manufacturer from all liability.

Components that are handled as Field Replaceable Units

– Processors (replacements)

– SAS / SATA backplanes

– Power backplane / power distribution board

– Front panel and front LAN connection

– Management and diagnostics modules

– System board

– Standard power supply unit

– Trusted Platform Module (TPM)

– USB Flash Module (UFM)

I

Please ask your local Fujitsu service center for more detailed information.

RX300 S7



2.2

Average task duration

Average task duration: 10 minutes

The average task duration including preliminary and concluding steps is indicated at the beginning of each procedure next to the procedure class.

Refer to table 1 on page 36 for an overview of steps taken into account for

calculating the average task duration:

Step

Server shutdown

Rack removal, disassembly

Transport

Maintenance procedures

Transport

Assembly, rack installation

Starting up

included Explanation

Shutdown time depends on hardware and software configuration and may vary significantly.

no

Software tasks necessary before maintenance are described in section

"Starting the maintenance task" on page 83

".

yes

no

yes

Making the server available, removing the server from the rack (if applicable)

Transporting the server to the service table

(where required) depends on local customer conditions.

Maintenance procedures including preliminary and concluding software tasks no

yes

no

Returning the server to its installation site

(where required) depends on local customer conditions.

Reassembling the server, installing the server in the rack (if applicable)

Booting time depends on hardware and software configuration and may vary significantly.

Table 1: Calculation of the average task duration


RX300


2.3

Tools you need at hand

When preparing the maintenance task, ensure that all required tools are available according to the overview below. You will find a list of required tools at the beginning of each procedure.

Screw driver /

Bit insert

Phillips

PH2 / (+) No. 2 hexagonal cross

SW5 / PZ2

Screw Usage

Backup drives, optical disk drives, chassis

Type

M3 x 4.5 mm

(silver)

C26192-Y10-C67

Phillips


SW5 / PZ2

System board

M3 x 6 mm

(silver)

C26192-Y10-C68

Phillips


SW5 / PZ2

Phillips

PH0 / (+) No. 0

Backup drives with

UNC thread

UNC

6-32 x 4.76 mm

(black)

2.5-inch

HDDs / SSDs

C26192-Y10-C75

M3 x 3.5 mm

Wafer head screw

(silver)

C26192-Y10-

C102

TPM bit insert

Dedicated TPM screw driver /

TPM module fixing tool (for the

Japanese market)

Table 2: List of required tools and used screws

TPM screw

One way head

(black)

REM 3 x 15 mm

(black)

C26192-Y10-

C176

RX300 S7



Screw driver /

Bit insert

Phillips

PH0 / (+) No. 0

Phillips

PH2 / (+) No. 2

Screw Usage Type

UFM nylon screw

M3 x 4.5 mm

(white)

A3C40109082

Foot mounting rail screws

M4 x 6 mm

Combination screw (silver)

C26192-Y10-C113

Phillips


SW5 / PZ2

LTO drive

Phillips

PH0 / (+) No. 0

Table 2: List of required tools and used screws

RDX drive


RX300


2.4

Documents you need at hand

Maintenance procedures may include references to additional documentation.

When preparing the maintenance task, ensure that all required manuals are available according to the overview below.

I

– Ensure to store all printed manuals enclosed with your server in a save place for future reference.

– Unless stated otherwise, all manuals are available online at


under Industry standard servers or from the

ServerView Suite DVD 2 supplied with your PRIMERGY server.

For the Japanese market please use the following address:


Document

"Quick Start Hardware -

PRIMERGY RX300 S7" leaflet

"PRIMERGY ServerView Suite -

Overview & Installation" DVD booklet

"Safety notes and regulations" manual

" 安全上のご注意 " for the

Japanese market

"PRIMERGY RX300 S7 Server"

Operating Manual

"D2939 BIOS Setup Utility for

PRIMERGY RX300 S7"

Reference Manual

Description

Quick installation poster for initial operation, available only in printed form

DVD booklet on initial software configuration included as a printed copy with the ServerView Suite

Important safety information, available from the ServerView Suite DVD 2, online, or as a printed copy available from the ServerView Suite DVD 2 or online

Information on configurable BIOS options and parameters, available from the

ServerView Suite DVD 2 or online

System board and service labels

Labels inside the side / top server cover outlining connectors, indicators and basic maintenance tasks

– "ServerView Suite Local Service

Concept (LSC)" user guide

Software documentation

– "ServerView Operations Manager -

Server Management" user guide

Table 3: Documentation you need at hand

RX300 S7



Document

Illustrated Spares catalog

Glossary

"Warranty" manual

" 保証書 " for the Japanese market

Description

Spare parts identification and information system (EMEA market only), available for online use or download (Windows OS) at


or from the CSS component view of the

ServerView Operations Manager available from the ServerView Suite DVD 2 or online

Important information on warranty regulations, recycling and service , available from the ServerView Suite DVD 2, online, or as a printed copy

"Returning used devices" manual

"Service Desk" leaflet

" サポート＆サービス " for the

Japanese market

Recycling and contact information, available from the ServerView Suite DVD 2, online, or as a printed copy

Additional documentation

Third party documentation

– "iRMC S2 / S3" user guide available from the ServerView Suite DVD 2 or online

– RAID documentation, available online at


under

Industry standard servers - Expansion

Cards - Storage Adapters

– Rack documentation

– Operating system documentation, online help

– Peripherals documentation

Table 3: Documentation you need at hand


RX300

3 Important information

V

CAUTION!

Before installing and starting up a device, please observe the safety instructions listed in the following section. This will help you to avoid making serious errors that could impair your health, damage the device and endanger the data base.

I

Keep this manual and the other documentation (such as the technical manual, documentation DVD) close to the device. All documentation must be included if the equipment is passed on to a third party.

3.1

Safety instructions

I

The following safety instructions are also provided in the manual "Safety

Notes and Regulations" or " 安全上のご注意 ".

This device meets the relevant safety regulations for IT equipment. If you have any questions about whether you can install the server in the intended environment, please contact your sales outlet or our customer service team.

●

The actions described in this manual shall be performed by technical specialists. A technical specialist is a person who is trained to install the server including hardware and software.

●

●

●

Repairs to the device that do not relate to CSS failures shall be performed by service personnel. Please note that unauthorized interference with the system will void the warranty and exempt the manufacturer from all liability.

Any failure to observe the guidelines in this manual, and any improper repairs could expose the user to risks (electric shock, energy hazards, fire hazards) or damage the equipment.

Before installing/removing internal options to/from the server, turn off the server, all peripheral devices, and any other connected devices. Also unplug all power cords from the power outlet. Failure to do so can cause electric shock or damage.

Before starting up

●

During installation and before operating the device, observe the instructions on environmental conditions for your device.

RX300 S7


Important information

●

●

If the device is brought in from a cold environment, condensation may form both inside and on the outside of the device.

Wait until the device has acclimatized to room temperature and is absolutely dry before starting it up. Material damage may be caused to the device if this requirement is not observed.

Transport the device only in the original packaging or in packaging that protects it from knocks and jolts.

For the Japanese market, transporting the device in its original packaging does not apply.

Installation and operation

●

●

●

●

●

This unit should not be operated in ambient temperatures above 35 °C.

If the unit is integrated into an installation that draws power from an industrial power supply network with an IEC309 connector, the power supply's fuse protection must comply with the requirements for non-industrial power supply networks for type A connectors.

The unit automatically adjusts itself to a mains voltage in a range of 100 VAC to 240 VAC. Ensure that the local mains voltage lies within these limits.

This device must only be connected to properly grounded power outlets or connected to the grounded rack internal power distribution system with tested and approved power cords.

Ensure that the device is connected to a properly grounded power outlet close to the device.

●

●

●

●

Ensure that the power sockets on the device and the properly grounded power outlets are easily accessible.

The On/Off button or the main power switch (if present) does not isolate the device from the mains power supply. In case of repair or servicing disconnect the device completely from the mains power supply, unplug all power plugs from the properly grounded power outlets.

Always connect the server and the attached peripherals to the same power circuit. Otherwise you run the risk of losing data if, for example, the server is still running but a peripheral device (e.g. memory subsystem) fails during a power outage.

Data cables must be adequately shielded.


RX300


●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Ethernet cabling has to comply with EN 50173 and EN 50174-1/2 standards or ISO/IEC 11801 standard respectively. The minimum requirement is a

Category 5 shielded cable for 10/100 Ethernet, or a Category 5e cable for

Gigabit Ethernet.

Route the cables in such a way that they do not create a potential hazard

(make sure no-one can trip over them) and that they cannot be damaged.

When connecting the server, refer to the relevant instructions in this manual.

Never connect or disconnect data transmission lines during a storm (risk of lightning hazard).

Make sure that no objects (e.g. jewelry, paperclips etc.) or liquids can get inside the server (risk of electric shock, short circuit).

In emergencies (e.g. damaged casing, controls or cables, penetration of liquids or foreign bodies), contact the system administrator or your customer service team. Only disconnect the system from the mains power supply if there is no risk of harming yourself.

Proper operation of the system (in accordance with IEC 60950-1 resp.

EN 60950-1) is only ensured if the casing is completely assembled and the rear covers for the installation slots have been fitted (electric shock, cooling, fire protection, interference suppression).

Only install system expansions that satisfy the requirements and rules governing safety and electromagnetic compatibility and those relating to telecommunication terminals. If you install other expansions, they may damage the system or violate the safety regulations. Information on which system expansions are approved for installation can be obtained from our customer service center or your sales outlet.

The components marked with a warning notice (e.g. lightning symbol) may only be opened, removed or exchanged by authorized, qualified personnel.

Exception: CSS components can be replaced.

The warranty is void if the server is damaged during installation or replacement of system expansions.

Only set screen resolutions and refresh rates that are specified in the operating manual for the monitor. Otherwise, you may damage your monitor.

If you are in any doubt, contact your sales outlet or customer service center.

Before installing/removing internal options to/from the server, turn off the server, all peripheral devices, and any other connected devices. Also unplug all power cords from the outlet. Failure to do so can cause electric shock.

RX300 S7



●

●

●

●

●

●

Do not damage or modify internal cables or devices. Doing so may cause a device failure, fire, or electric shock and will void the warranty and exempt the manufacturer from all liability.

Devices inside the server remain hot after shutdown. Wait for a while after shutdown before installing or removing internal options.

The circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed and can be damaged by static electricity. To ensure reliable protection, if you are wearing an earthing band on your wrist when working with this type of module, connect it to an unpainted, non-conducting metal part of the system.

Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold the metallic areas or the edges of the circuit boards.

Install the screw removed during installation/detaching internal options in former device/position. To use a screw of the different kind can cause a breakdown of equipment.

The installation indicated on this document is sometimes changed to the kind of possible options without notice.

Batteries

●

●

●

●

●

●

Incorrect replacement of batteries may lead to a risk of explosion. The batteries may only be replaced with identical batteries or with a type recommended by the manufacturer.

Do not throw batteries into the trash can.

Batteries must be disposed of in accordance with local regulations concerning special waste.

Make sure that you insert the battery the right way round.

The battery used in this device may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not disassemble, heat about 100 °C (212F), or incinerate the battery.

All batteries containing pollutants are marked with a symbol (a crossed-out garbage can). In addition, the marking is provided with the chemical symbol of the heavy metal decisive for the classification as a pollutant:

Cd Cadmium

Hg Mercury

Pb Lead


RX300


Working with optical disk drives and media

When working with optical disk drives, these instructions must be followed.

V

CAUTION!

●

Only use CDs/DVDs/BDs that are in perfect condition, in order to prevent data loss, equipment damage and injury.

●

●

Check each CD/DVD/BD for damage, cracks, breakages etc. before inserting it in the drive.

Note that any additional labels applied may change the mechanical properties of a CD/DVD/BD and cause imbalance and vibrations.

Damaged and imbalanced CDs/DVDs/BDs can break at high drive speeds (data loss).

Under certain circumstances, sharp CD/DVD/BD fragments can pierce the cover of the optical disk drive (equipment damage) and can fly out of the device (danger of injury, particularly to uncovered body parts such as the face or neck).

High humidity and airborne dust levels are to be avoided. Electric shocks and/or server failures may be caused by liquids such as water, or metallic items, such as paper clips, entering a drive.

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Shocks and vibrations are also to be avoided.

Do not insert any objects other than the specified CDs/DVDs/BDs.

Do not pull on, press hard, or otherwise handle the CD/DVD/BD tray roughly.

Do not disassemble the optical disk drive.

Before use, clean the optical disk tray using a soft, dry cloth.

As a precaution, remove disks from the optical disk drive when the drive is not to be used for a long time. Keep the optical disk tray closed to prevent foreign matter, such as dust, from entering the optical disk drive.

Hold CDs/DVDs/BDs by their edges to avoid contact with the disk surface.

RX300 S7



●

●

●

●

●

●

Do not contaminate the CD/DVD/BD surface with fingerprints, oil, dust, etc. If dirty, clean with a soft, dry cloth, wiping from the center to the edge. Do not use benzene, thinners, water, record sprays, antistatic agents, or silicone-impregnated cloth.

Be careful not to damage the CD/DVD/BD surface.

Keep the CDs/DVDs/BDs away from heat sources.

Do not bend or place heavy objects on CDs/DVDs/BDs.

Do not write with ballpoint pen or pencil on the label (printed) side.

When a CD/DVD/BD is moved from a cold place to a warm place, moisture condensation on the CD/DVD/BD surface can cause data read errors. In this case, wipe the CD/DVD/BD with a soft, dry cloth then let it air dry. Do not dry the CD/DVD/BD using devices such as a hair dryer.

●

To avoid dust, damage, and deformation, keep the CD/DVD/BD in its case whenever it is not in use.

●

Do not store CDs/DVDs/BDs at high temperatures. Areas exposed to prolonged direct sunlight or near heating appliances are to be avoided.

I

You can prevent damage from the optical disk drive and the

CDs/DVDs/BDs, as well as premature wear of the disks, by observing the following suggestions:

– Only insert disks in the drive when needed and remove them after use.

– Store the disks in suitable sleeves.

– Protect the disks from exposure to heat and direct sunlight.

Laser information

The optical disk drive complies with IEC 60825-1 laser class 1.

V

CAUTION!

The optical disk drive contains a light-emitting diode (LED), which under certain circumstances produces a laser beam stronger than laser class 1. Looking directly at this beam is dangerous.

Never remove parts of the optical disk drive casing!


RX300


Modules with Electrostatic-Sensitive Devices

Modules with electrostatic-sensitive devices are identified by the following sticker:

Figure 1: ESD label

When you handle components fitted with ESDs, you must always observe the following points:

●

●

Switch off the system and remove the power plugs from the power outlets before installing or removing components with ESDs.

The circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed and can be damaged by static electricity. To ensure reliable protection, you must wear an earthing band on your wrist when working with this type of module and connect it to an unpainted, non-conducting metal part of the system.

Any devices or tools that are used must be free of electrostatic charge.

●

●

●

Wear a suitable grounding cable that connects you to the external chassis of the system unit.

Always hold components with ESDs at the edges or at the points marked green (touch points).

Do not touch any connectors or conduction paths on an ESD.

●

●

Place all the components on a pad which is free of electrostatic charge.

I

For a detailed description of how to handle ESD components, see the relevant European or international standards (EN 61340-5-1,

ANSI/ESD S20.20).

RX300 S7



Transporting the server

●

●

Only transport the server in its original packaging or in packaging that protects it from impacts and jolts.

For the Japanese market, transporting the device in its original packaging does not apply.

Do not unpack the server until it is at its installation location.

●

●

If you need to lift or transport the server, ask other people to help you.

Because the PRIMERGY RX300 S7 is large and heavy, at least two people are needed.

Never lift or carry the device by the handles on the front panel.

Notes on installing the server in the rack

●

For safety reasons, at least two people are required to install the server

in the rack because of its weight and size.

(For the Japanese market, please refer to " 安全上のご注意 ".)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Never lift the server into the rack using the handles on the front panel.

When connecting and disconnecting cables, observe the relevant instructions in the "Important Information" chapter of the technical manual for the corresponding rack. The technical manual is supplied with the corresponding rack.

When installing the rack, make sure that the anti-tilt protection is correctly fitted.

For safety reasons, no more than one unit may be removed from the rack at any one time during installation and maintenance work.

If several units are simultaneously removed from the rack, there is a risk that the rack could tip over.

The rack must be connected to the power supply by an authorized specialist

(electrician).

If the server is integrated into an installation that draws power from an industrial power supply network with an IEC309 type connector, the power supply's fuse protection must comply with the requirements for nonindustrial power supply networks for the type A connector.


RX300


3.2

ENERGY STAR

Products that have been certified compliant with ENERGY STAR and identified as such are in full compliance with the specification at shipping. Note that energy consumption can be affected by software that is installed or any changes that are made to the hardware configuration or BIOS or energy options subsequently.

In such cases, the properties guaranteed by ENERGY STAR can no longer be assured.

The "ServerView Operations Manager" user guide contains instructions for reading out measurement values, including those relating to current energy consumption and air temperatures.

Either the Performance Monitor or the Task Manager can be used to read out CPU utilization levels.

3.3

CE conformity

The system complies with the requirements of the EC directives

2004/108/EC regarding "Electromagnetic Compatibility" and

2006/95/EC "Low Voltage Directive". This is indicated by the CE marking (CE = Communauté Européenne).

RX300 S7



3.4

FCC Class A Compliance Statement

If there is an FCC statement on the device, it applies to the products covered in this manual, unless otherwise specified herein. The statement for other products will appear in the accompanying documentation.

NOTE:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a

"Class A" digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules and meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard

ICES-003 for digital apparatus. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in strict accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no warranty that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

●

●

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between equipment and the receiver.

●

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

●

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Fujitsu is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modifications of this equipment or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than those specified by Fujitsu. The correction of interferences caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution or attachment will be the responsibility of the user.

The use of shielded I/O cables is required when connecting this equipment to any and all optional peripheral or host devices. Failure to do so may violate FCC and ICES rules.

WARNING:

This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.


RX300


3.5

Environmental protection

Environmentally-friendly product design and development

This product has been designed in accordance with the Fujitsu standard for

"environmentally friendly product design and development". This means that key factors such as durability, selection and labeling of materials, emissions, packaging, ease of dismantling and recycling have been taken into account.

This saves resources and thus reduces the harm done to the environment.

Further information can be found at:

– http://ts.fujitsu.com/products/standard_servers/index.html (for the EMEA market)

– http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/concept/ (for the Japanese market)

Energy-saving information

Devices that do not need to be constantly switched on should be switched off until they are needed as well as during long breaks and after completion of work.

Packaging information

This packaging information doesn’t apply to the Japanese market.

Do not throw away the packaging. You may need it later for transporting the system. If possible, the equipment should only be transported in its original packaging.

Information on handling consumables

Please dispose of printer consumables and batteries in accordance with the applicable national regulations.

In accordance with EU directives, batteries must not be disposed of with unsorted domestic waste. They can be returned free of charge to the manufacturer, dealer or an authorized agent for recycling or disposal.

All batteries containing pollutants are marked with a symbol (a crossed-out garbage can). They are also marked with the chemical symbol for the heavy metal that causes them to be categorized as containing pollutants:

Cd Cadmium

Hg Mercury

RX300 S7



Pb Lead

Labels on plastic casing parts

Please avoid sticking your own labels on plastic parts wherever possible, since this makes it difficult to recycle them.

Returns, recycling and disposal

Please handle returns, recycling and disposal in accordance with local regulations.

The device must not be disposed of with domestic waste. This device is labeled in compliance with European directive

2002/96/EC on waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE).

This directive sets the framework for returning and recycling used equipment and is valid across the EU. When returning your used device, please use the return and collection systems available to you. Further information can be found at

http://ts.fujitsu.com/recycling

.

Details regarding the return and recycling of devices and consumables within

Europe can also be found in the "Returning used devices" manual, via your local

Fujitsu branch or from our recycling center in Paderborn:

Fujitsu Technology Solutions

Recycling Center

D-33106 Paderborn

Tel. +49 5251 525 1410

Fax +49 5251 525 32 1410


RX300

4 Basic hardware procedures

4.1

Using diagnostics information

The "PRIMERGY RX300 S7 Server Operating manual" gives an introduction to server features and provides an overview of available hardware options.

Use the Fujitsu ServerView Suite management software to plan the upgrade or replacement of hardware components. ServerView Suite documentation is available online at


or from the ServerView Suite DVD

2 supplied with your PRIMERGY server. Please refer to the following

ServerView Suite topics:

– Operation

– Maintenance

It is recommended to prepare local maintenance tasks using remote diagnostics procedures, as described in the "ServerView Suite Local Service

Concept (LSC)" manual available from the ServerView Suite DVD 2 supplied with your PRIMERGY server or online at


(EMEA market) or


(Japanese market).

Please contact your local Fujitsu customer service partner for details on the service concept and on how to order expansion kits or spare parts. Use the

Fujitsu Illustrated Spares Catalog to identify the required spare part and obtain technical data and order information. Illustrated Spares catalogs are available online at


(EMEA market only).

Perform the following diagnostics procedures to identify defective servers and components:

RX300 S7


Basic hardware procedures

4.1.1

Locating the defective server

Figure 2: Identification button and indicator on front panel

Figure 3: Identification indicator on connector panel

When working in a datacenter environment, switch on the ID indicator on the front and rear connector panels of the server for easy identification.

Ê

Press the ID button on the front panel (2) or use the ServerView Operation

Manager user interface to switch on the system identification LEDs (1).


RX300


I

For further information, refer to the "ServerView Suite Local Service



(EMEA market) or


(Japanese market).

Ê

When using ServerView Operations Manager to toggle the ID indicator, choose Single System View and press the Locate button.

Ê

Remember to switch off the ID indicator after the maintenance task has been concluded successfully.

4.1.2

Determining the error class

The Local Service Concept (LSC) allows you to identify defective server components. Failure events are assigned to one of two error classes:

– Global Error events that need to be resolved by maintenance personnel

– Customer Self Service (CSS) error events that may be resolved by operating personnel

Global Error and CSS LEDs indicate, if the defective component is a customer replaceable unit or if maintenance personnel needs to be dispatched to replace the part.

I

The indicators also light up in standby mode and after a server restart due to a power failure.

RX300 S7



4.1.2.1

Global Error indicator

Figure 4: Global Error indicator on front panel

Ê

Check the Global Error indicator on the front or connector panel of the server:

Indicator

Global error indicator

Status

off orange on orange flashing

Description

no critical event (non CSS component) prefailure detected (non CSS component), requires (precautionary) service intervention non CSS component failure or software / agent related error, requires service intervention

Ê

For further diagnostics, proceed as follows:

– Hardware errors:

Check the System Event Log (SEL) as described in section "Viewing the

SEL" on page 103

.

– Software / agent related errors:


RX300


Check the ServerView System Monitor, available on Windows or Linux based servers with ServerView agents installed.

I

For further information, please refer to the "ServerView System

Monitor" user guide, available online at


or from the ServerView Suite DVD 2 supplied with your

PRIMERGY server

4.1.2.2

Customer Self Service (CSS) indicator

Figure 5: CSS indicator in front panel

Ê

Check the CSS indicator on the front panel or connector panel of the server:

Indicator

CSS indicator

Status

off

Description

no critical event (CSS component) yellow on prefailure detected (CSS component) yellow flashing

CSS component failure

RX300 S7



4.1.3

Locating the defective component

After determining the error class by the CSS or Global Error indicators (see section

4.1.2 on page 55 ) local diagnostic indicators on the front panel and

system board allow you to identify the defective component.

I

For further information, refer to the "ServerView Suite Local Service



(EMEA market) or


(Japanese market).

4.1.3.1

Local diagnostic indicators on the front

Figure 6: Local diagnostic indicators on front panel

Ê

Check the CSS indicator on the front and connector panels of the server:


RX300


1

Indicator

HDD / SSD error indicator

2

PSU error indicator

3

4

5

6

Temperature error indicator

Fan error indicator

Memory error indicator

CPU error indicator

Status

orange on orange on orange on

Description

HDD / SSD, SAS / SATA backplane or

RAID controller failure detected

Hot-plug PSU module failure detected

I

Only available in redundant

PSU configurations

Operating temperature levels above permitted limits orange on Fan prefailure or failure event detected orange on Memory module failure detected orange on CPU prefailure event detected

I

In addition to local diagnostic indicators, CSS or Global Error LEDs indicate, if the defective component is a customer or field replaceable

unit (see section "Determining the error class" on page 55

).

RX300 S7



4.1.3.2

Local diagnostic indicators on the system board

F

Slot 6 PCIe x16

Slot 5 PCIe x16

VGA

Management

LAN

LAN 2

A

Shared

LAN

B

C

LAN

CTRL

H

G

H

Serial 1

USB

1/2

USB

3/4

F

Slot 4 PCIe x8 (mech. x16)


NC-SI



Intrusion

HDD LED

1

JP1

CPU 2

CPU 2 DIMM 1G

CPU 2 DIMM 2G

CPU 2 DIMM 3G

CPU 2 DIMM 1H

CPU 2 DIMM 2H

CPU 2 DIMM 3H

CPU 2 DIMM 3F

CPU 2 DIMM 2F

CPU 2 DIMM 1F

CPU 2 DIMM 3E

CPU 2 DIMM 2E

CPU 2 DIMM 1E

BIOS-WP

F

K

I

PWR

PSU Control

L

PWR

HDD/ODD

Front VGA

Front LAN M

Front Panel

SMB 1

P

Battery

INDICATE

CSS iRMC

M N

TPM

USB

INT 2

USB

INT 1

/

FAN 5

O

CPU 1 DIMM 1A

CPU 1 DIMM 2A

CPU 1 DIMM 3A

CPU 1 DIMM 1B

CPU 1 DIMM 2B

CPU 1 DIMM 3B

FAN 4

O

H

O

CPU 1

CPU 1 DIMM 3D

CPU 1 DIMM 2D

CPU 1 DIMM 1D

CPU 1 DIMM 3C

CPU 1 DIMM 2C

CPU 1 DIMM 1C

G

H

FAN 3

FAN 2

O

JP8

PCH

Slot 7 PCIe x8 (RAID)

USB stick

SKU Key

SATA 1SATA 2

SMB 4

UFM

FAN 1

SAS 1-4

O

Figure 7: Onboard indicators and Indicate CSS button

No. Description

1 Indicate CSS button

Using the Indicate CSS button

Ê

Shut down and power off the server.

Ê

Disconnect the AC power cord from the system.

I

It is mandatory to disconnect power cords in order to use the Indicate

CSS functionality.


RX300


Ê

Press the Indicate CSS button (1) to highlight defective components.

Component LEDs

I

LEDs A, B and C are visible from the outside on the server rear. All other

LEDs are only visible if the server cover has been opened. In order to access memory LEDs (D), the system fan module needs to be removed

(see section

"Removing a fan module" on page 172

).

Indicator Status

A

B

Identification

CSS

(Customer Self

Service) blue on

Description

server has been highlighted using the ID button on the front panel for easy identification blue flashing server has been highlighted using IRMC

(AVR) when local VGA off for easy identification no critical event (CSS component) off yellow on prefailure detected (CSS component) yellow flashing

CSS component failure off no critical event (non CSS component)

C

GEL

(Global Error

LED) orange on prefailure detected (non CSS component) non CSS component failure

Possible reasons: orange flashing

– sensors report overheating

– sensor is defective

– CPU error

– software reports an error orange on controller faulty

F

Controller

G

CPU

H

Memory module orange on orange on

I

PS CTRL OK green on

CPU faulty memory module faulty power supply OK

K

PS CTRL Error orange on powe supply error

L

Main power green on voltage ok

RX300 S7



Indicator Status Description

M

Standby power yellow on voltage ok

N

O

P

iRMC fans battery green flashing iRMC S3 ok orange on Fan faulty orange on battery faulty

I

In addition to local diagnostic indicators, CSS or Global Error LEDs indicate, if the defective component is a customer replaceable unit or if a service technician needs to be dispatched to replace the part (see section

"Determining the error class" on page 55

).

If the system has been powered off to replace a non hot-plug unit, a system of PRIMERGY diagnostics indicators guides you to the faulty component.

4.2

Opening the rack door

I

The following description only applies to the PRIMECENTER M1 rack.

For further instructions on opening or closing the 19-inch rack, please refer to the "19-inch Rack for PRIMERGY and RM systems" assembly guide, available online at


or from the


The PRIMECENTER M1 rack is equipped with a split front door. The left-hand door contains an interlocking system that can be locked and opened with a key.

Optionally, a revolving door knob can be mounted for key-less locking. To unlock and open the rack, proceed as follows:

Ê

Insert and turn the key by counter-clockwise by 180 degrees.

If applicable, turn the door knob counter-clockwise by 180 degrees.

Ê

Open the left-hand door first, then the right-hand door.

I

For further information, refer to the "PRIMECENTER Rack System" assembly guide available online at


or from the



RX300


4.3

Shutting down the server

V

CAUTION!

For further safety information, please refer to chapter

"Important information" on page 41

.

I

This step is only required when upgrading or replacing non-hot plug components.

Ê

Inform the system administrator that the server will be shut down and put offline.

Ê

Terminate all applications.

Ê

Verify if your backup software solution requires preparative configuration before starting the procedure as described in section

"Verifying and configuring the backup software solution" on page 86 .

Ê

In case of Multipath I/O environments, please refer to section

"Note on server maintenance in a Multipath I/O environment" on page 87

.

Ê

Remove all backup and optical disk media from backup and optical disk drives as described in section

"Removing backup and optical disk media" on page 86 .

Figure 8: Power button on the front panel

RX300 S7



Ê

Shut down the server (1).

I

If the system is running an ACPI-compliant operating system, pressing the On / Off button will perform a graceful shutdown.

Ê

Switch on the ID indicator on the front and rear connector panels of the

server as described in section "Locating the defective server" on page 54

.

4.4

Disconnecting power cords

I if there are installed two power supplies remove both power cords

Figure 9: Removing the power cord from the PSU cable clamp

Ê

Open on the locking lever on the PSU cable clamp (1).

Ê

Disconnect the power cord from the PSU and remove it from the cable tie

(2).


RX300


4.5

Extending/removing the server from the rack

I

In most cases maintenance tasks can be performed while the server is extended from the rack. However, depending on accessibility or security guidelines, it may make sense to completely remove the server from the rack cabinet for maintenance purposes.

V

CAUTION!

●

Use the anti-tilt plate to prevent the rack from tipping when installing the rack. Pulling the server out of the rack without having installed the anti-tilt plate may cause the rack to tip over.

●

Be careful not to pinch fingers or clothes when sliding out the server or pushing it back. Failure to do so may cause injury.

●

For further safety information, please refer to chapter "Important information" on page 41 .

4.5.1

Preliminary steps

Ê

"Opening the rack door" on page 62

Ê

"Shutting down the server" on page 63

Ê

"Disconnecting power cords" on page 64

Ê

Remove all remaining external cables from the rear connector panel and expansion cards. For further information, refer to section

"Connectors and indicators" on page 531

.

RX300 S7



4.5.2

Extending the server out of the rack

Figure 10: Extending the server out of the rack

Ê

Shut down the server and remove external cables as described in section

"Preliminary steps" on page 65

.

Ê

If you are not using a cable mounting arm (CMA kit), ensure that the rear cables are long enough not to be strained or damaged when extending the server out of the rack.

Ê

Fold down the two quick release levers on the rack mounting frame (1) and pull the server out of the rack until it locks in place (2).

V

CAUTION!

Do not use the extended server as a surface on which to put things or as a work surface, and strictly avoid leaning on or against it.


RX300


4.5.3

Removing the server from the rack

V

CAUTION!

At least two people are needed to lift the server out of the rack cabinet.


For configurations below 32 kg:



At least three people are needed to lift the server out of the rack cabinet.

For configurations above 55 kg:

At least four people are needed to lift the server out of the rack cabinet.

Additionally, a lifter is required in the following cases:

– The server weighs more than 50 kg.

– The server weighs more than 21 kg and is installed above the height of 25 U.

When using a lifter, this removal procedure needs to carried out by maintenance personnel.

RX300 S7



Ê

Shut down the server and remove external cables as described in section

"Preliminary steps" on page 65

.

Ê

Unlatch and pull the server out of the rack as described in section

"Extending the server out of the rack" on page 66 .

Figure 11: Removing the server from the rack

Ê

Release the locking bars on both rails (1).

Ê

Lift up the front of the server as shown so that the front and middle rack mounting bolts are disengaged from the mounting points on the telescopic rails.

Ê

Lift the server out of the rear mounting points (3) and place it on an even surface.


RX300


4.6

Opening the server

V

CAUTION!

●

Before removing or installing covers, turn off the server and all peripheral devices. Also unplug all power cables from the outlet.

Failure to do so can cause electric shock.

●

●

In order to comply with applicable EMC regulations (regulations on electromagnetic compatibility) and satisfy cooling requirements, the

PRIMERGY RX300 S7 server must not run while the server cover is removed.


4.6.1

Removing the server cover

Figure 12: Removing the server cover

Ê

Open the locking lever. This will slide the top cover back disengaging the locking mechanism.

RX300 S7



Figure 13: Removing the server cover

Ê

Remove the server cover.

4.6.2

Removing the air duct

Figure 14: Removing the air duct

Ê

Remove the air duct.


RX300

4.6.3

Installing the air duct


Figure 15: Installing the air duct guiding points

I

Regard that the air duct engages in the guiding points.

RX300 S7



Figure 16: Installing the air duct

Ê

Insert the air duct first with the rear side (1).


RX300


4.7

Closing the server

V

CAUTION!

●

Before attaching the covers, make sure no unnecessary parts or tools are left inside the server.

●

●




4.7.1

Mounting the server cover

Figure 17: Mounting the server cover

Ê

Open the locking lever on the top cover.

Ê

Fit the server cover on the chassis, aligning it according to the edge guide marking on the upper server surface.

Ê

Lower the server cover onto the chassis.

RX300 S7



Figure 18: Mounting the server cover

Ê

Close the locking lever on the server cover. This will slide the server cover shut engaging the locking mechanism.

4.8

Mounting the server in the rack

4.8.1

Seating the server on the rack rails

V

CAUTION!

At least two people are needed to position the server on the rack rails.




74


At least three people are needed to lift the server out of the rack cabinet.


RX300


For configurations above 55 kg:

At least four people are needed to lift the server out of the rack cabinet.

RX300 S7



V

CAUTION!

Additionally, a lifter is required in the following cases:

– The server weighs more than 50 kg.

– The server weighs more than 21 kg and is to be installed above the height of 25 U.

When using a lifter, this removal procedure needs to carried out by maintenance personnel.

I

Refer to the rack cabinet manuals for more detailed information on other support systems.

Ê

If required, install the rack mounting bracket and rack system into the rack as described in the Rack Mounting Kit - RMK-F1/F2 DROP-IN Quick

Release Lever (QRL)" Mounting Instructions.

I

The printed poster is contained in the rack mounting kit.

Figure 19: Mounting the server onto the rack rails

Ê

Fully extend the telescopic rails until they lock in place (1).

Ê

At a slight angle, lower the server onto the rear mounting point on the telescopic rails (2).


RX300


Ê

Fold down the server (3). Ensure that all six rack mounting bolts are properly seated in the mounting points on the telescopic rails and that the locking bars engage (4).

4.8.2

Sliding the server into the rack

Figure 20: Sliding the server into the rack

Ê

Pull up on the locking latch on both telescopic rails (1).

Ê

Slide the server inside the rack as far as it will go (2) until the quick release levers on the rack mounting frame lock into place.

Ê

Reconnect all cables except the power cord to the server rear.

I

If you are not using a cable mounting arm (CMA kit), ensure that the rear cables are long enough not to be strained or damaged when extending the server out of the rack.

Use cable ties to prevent loose cables from blocking the air flow.

For information on connecting and securing the power cord, refer to section

"Connecting the server to the mains" on page 78

.

RX300 S7



4.9

Connecting the server to the mains

The PRIMERGY RX300 S7 server is equipped with a standard power supply unit that automatically adjusts to any mains voltage in the range of 100 VAC to

240 VAC.

V

CAUTION!

The power supply automatically adjusts to any mains voltage in the range of 100 VAC to 240 VAC. You may only operate the server if its rated voltage range corresponds to the local mains voltage.

Ê

Connect the power cord to the power supply unit.

Ê

Connect the mains plug to a grounded mains outlet in the in-house power supply network or a power outlet of the rack socket strip (see also

"PRIMECENTER Rack System" assembly guide).

Securing power cords

Figure 21: Securing power cord

Ê

Insert the power connector (1).


RX300


Ê

Close the cable clamp around the power cord (2) and lock the cable clamp (3) to secure the power cord.

4.10 Switching on the server

V

CAUTION!

●

Before switching on the server, make sure the server cover is closed.



●

Follow the safety instructions in chapter "Important information" on page 41

.

Ê

Connect all peripheral cables to the rear connector panel of the server.

Ê

Connect and secure the power cords as described in section


.

Ê

Connect all power cords to the power outlets.

I

To provide true phase redundancy, the second power supply should be connected to a different AC power source from the other supply. If one AC power source should fail, the server will still continue to run.

RX300 S7



Figure 22: Power button on the front panel

Ê

Press the On / Off button to start up the server (1).

Ê

Ensure that the power-on indicator above the On / Off button is lit green.

I

For more information, refer to section

"Front panel controls and indicators" on page 541

.

4.11

Concluding software tasks

Ê

Perform the following software tasks to put the server back in operation:

–

"Resetting the boot retry counter" on page 98

–

"Verifying the system time settings" on page 102

–

"Viewing and clearing the System Event Log (SEL)" on page 103

–

"Updating the NIC configuration file in a Linux environment" on page 104

–

"Enabling BitLocker functionality" on page 106

–

"Performing a RAID array rebuild" on page 107

–

"Looking up changed MAC / WWN addresses" on page 107


RX300


4.12 Closing the rack door

The PRIMECENTER M1 rack is equipped with a split front door. The left-hand door contains an interlocking system that can be locked and opened with a key.

Optionally, a revolving door knob can be mounted for key-less locking. To close and lock the rack, proceed as follows:

Ê

Close the right-hand door first, then the left-hand door.

Ê

Insert and turn the key clockwise by 180 degrees.

If applicable, turn the door knob clockwise by 180 degrees.

I

For further information, refer to the "PRIMECENTER Rack System" assembly guide available online at


or from the


RX300 S7




RX300

5 Basic software procedures

5.1

Starting the maintenance task

5.1.1

Disabling BitLocker functionality

BitLocker Drive Encryption provides protection for operating system and data drives by encrypting the contents and requiring users to authenticate their credentials to access the information. On the operating system drive, BitLocker uses the compatible Trusted Platform Module (TPM) to detect if the computer's startup process has been modified from its original state.

Disabling BitLocker Drive Encryption is a temporary method for removing

BitLocker protection without decrypting the drive Windows is installed on.

Disable BitLocker before modifying the server’s hardware configuration or startup files. Enable BitLocker again after the maintenance procedure is complete.

V

CAUTION!

– With BitLocker features enabled, modifying the system configuration

(hardware or firmware settings) may render the system inaccessible.

The system may enter Recovery Mode and require a 48-digits recovery password to return to normal operation.

Ensure to disable BitLocker drive encryption before maintaining the server.

– When disabled, BitLocker uses a plain text key instead of the Trusted

Platform Module (TPM) to read encrypted files. Keep in mind that information on this drive is not secure until BitLocker has been reenabled.

Ê

Ask the system administrator to disable BitLocker-protection on the operating system drive, using the BitLocker setup wizard available either from the Control Panel or Windows Explorer:

Ê

Open BitLocker Drive Encryption by clicking the Start button, clicking

Control Panel, clicking Security, and then clicking Bitlocker Drive

Encryption.

RX300 S7


Basic software procedures

I

Administrator permission required: If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the password or provide confirmation.

Ê

To temporarily disable BitLocker, click Turn Off BitLocker, and then click

Disable BitLocker Drive Encryption.

I

In order to determine which features are accessible through the

BitLocker setup wizard, modify the BitLocker Group Policy settings.

For further information on how to disable BitLocker drive encryption, please refer to the Microsoft Knowledge Base.

Fujitsu service partners will find additional information (also available in Japanese) on the Fujitsu Extranet web pages.

5.1.2

Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality

The ServerView Operation Manager boot watchdog determines whether the server boots within a preset time frame. If the watchdog timer expires, the system will automatically reboot.

5.1.2.1

Viewing boot watchdog settings

To view boot watchdog settings in ServerView Operations Manager, proceed as follows:

Ê

In ServerView Operations Manager Single System View select Maintenance from the Information / Operation menu.

Ê

Under ASR&R select the Watchdog tab to obtain detailed information about the current watchdog status, timeout intervals and actions that are triggered if watchdog timeouts are exceeded.

I

For more detailed information, refer to the "ServerView Operations

Manager - Server Management" user guide available online at


or from the ServerView Suite DVD 2 supplied with your PRIMERGY server.


RX300


5.1.2.2

Configuring boot watchdog settings

If the system is to be started from removable boot media for firmware upgrade purposes, the Boot watchdog needs to be disabled before starting maintenance task. Otherwise, the Boot watchdog might initiate a system reboot before the flash process is complete.

V

CAUTION!

An incomplete firmware upgrade process may render the server inaccessible or result in damaged / destroyed hardware.

Timer settings can be configured in the BIOS or using the ServerView iRMC web frontend:

Configuring boot watchdog settings in the BIOS

Ê

Enter the BIOS.

Ê

Select the Server Mgmt menu.

Ê

Under Boot Watchdog set the Action setting to Continue.

Ê

Save your changes and exit the BIOS.

I

For detailed information on how to access the BIOS and modify settings, refer to the "System Board D2939 BIOS Setup Utility" reference manual.

Configuring boot watchdog settings using the iRMC web frontend

Ê

Enter the ServerView iRMC web frontend.

Ê

Select the Server Management menu.

Ê

Under Watchdog Settings select Continue from the Boot Watchdog drop down list.

Ê

Click Apply for the changes to take effect.

I

For detailed information on iRMC settings, refer to the "Integrated

Remote Management Controller" user guides available online at



RX300 S7



5.1.3

Removing backup and optical disk media

Ê

Ask the system administrator to eject all remaining backup or optical media from the backup or optical disk drive before removing it from the server.

Ê

If the backup media cannot be ejected by conventional means, and it is mandatory that the cartridge be removed prior to returning the drive for repair or disposing it, a manual tape extraction needs to be performed.

For further information on "forcible" tape ejection, please refer to the "Tape

Facts" guide available to Fujitsu service partners from the following https address:

https://partners.ts.fujitsu.com/com/service/ps/Servers/PRIMERGY/Pages/

TapeFacts.aspx

I

Fujitsu does not assume responsibility for any damage to the tape drive, the data cartridge / tape or for the loss of any data resulting from manual tape extraction procedures.

5.1.4

Verifying and configuring the backup software solution

I

This task only applies to the Japanese market.

Depending on the backup software solution, it may be necessary to disable or delete the backup drive from the backup software drive list before starting the maintenance task.

This is the case for the following backup software solution:

– BackupExec

I

Procedures may differ depending on the backup software. For details, refer to the dedicated documentation provided separately.

Further information on suitable backup software solutions and related documentation is available to Fujitsu service partners from the Fujitsu

Extranet pages.


RX300


5.1.5

Note on server maintenance in a Multipath I/O environment

When booting your server offline from the ServerView Suite DVD 1 to perform an offline driver update using the ServerView Update DVD or collect diagnostic data using PrimeCollect in a Multipath I/O environment, there is a risk of damaging the system configuration which may leave the system unable to boot.

This is a known restriction of Windows PE with Multipath drivers.

Before using the ServerView Update DVD or PrimeCollect in an offline environment, Fujitsu recommends to properly shut down the server and to disconnect all external I/O connections (like LAN or FC cables) from the system.

Only keep mouse, keyboard, video cable and AC power cord connected.

Continue as follows:

Ê

If performing an offline driver update, first of all prepare the ServerView

Update DVD:

Ê

Download the latest ServerView Update DVD image from the Fujitsu

FTP server at

ftp://ftp.ts.fujitsu.com/images/serverview

.

Ê

Burn the image to a DVD.


Ê

Locate, download and burn the ServerView Update DVD image available from the following URL:

http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/products/note/svsdvd/dvd/

Ê

Ensure that all external I/O connections have been removed from the server.

I

Ensure that all external I/O connections are uniquely identified so that you can reconnect them into their original locations after concluding the task.

Ê

Switch on the server.

Ê

Right after switching on the server, insert the ServerView Suite DVD 1 into the DVD drive and close the drive tray.

The server will now boot from the DVD.

Ê

After the boot process is complete, select your preferred GUI language.

Ê

In the initial Installation Manager startup window, choose either Update

Manager Express or PrimeCollect from the Installation Manager mode section.

RX300 S7



Ê

Click Continue to proceed.

If Update Manager Express has been selected, insert the ServerView Update

DVD into the DVD drive before proceeding.

Ê

Finish the intended maintenance task. For further information, refer to the following manuals available online at


or from the

ServerView Suite DVD 2 supplied with your PRIMERGY server:

– ServerView Update Manager Express:

"Local System Update for PRIMERGY Servers" user guide

– PrimeCollect:

"PrimeCollect" user guide

Ê

After the update or diagnostic procedure has been completed, shut down the server, reconnect all external I/O connections and bring the system back to normal operation.

Ê

If necessary, perform this procedure for all remaining servers within the

Multipath environment.


RX300


5.1.6

Switching on the ID indicator

When working in a datacenter environment, switch on the ID indicator on the front and rear connector panels of the server for easy identification.

I

For further information, refer to section "Locating the defective server" on page 54

or to the "ServerView Suite Local Service Concept (LSC)" manual available from the ServerView Suite DVD 2 supplied with your



(EMEA market) or


(Japanese market).

Using the ID button on the front panel

Ê

Press the ID button on the front panel to switch on the system identification

LEDs.

I

For further information, refer to section

"Front panel controls and indicators" on page 541 .

Using ServerView Operations Manager

Ê

In ServerView Operations Manager Single System View and press the Locate button in the title bar to switch on the ID indicators.

RX300 S7



5.2

Completing the maintenance task

5.2.1

Updating or recovering the system board BIOS and iRMC

After replacing the system board, it is essential to upgrade the BIOS and iRMC to the latest version. The latest BIOS and iRMC versions are available from the

Fujitsu support internet pages at:

http://ts.fujitsu.com/support/

(EMEA market)

http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/downloads/

(Japanese market)

I

Fujitsu does not assume responsibility for any damage done to the server or for the loss of any data resulting from BIOS updates.

5.2.1.1

Updating or recovering the system board BIOS

BIOS flash procedure

I

For the Japanese market, follow the instructions provided separately.

Ê

Prepare a USB stick with the following files:

– Update tool

– Startup.nsh (which will execute the update tool)

– BIOS image file for update (16 MB with header information)

Ê

Connect the USB stick to the USB port.

Ê

Restart the server.

The system will detect the USB stick and start DOS.

Ê

Enter cd DOS and press [Enter] in order to change to the DOS directory on the USB stick.

Ê

Enter DosFlash.BAT and press [Enter] to start the BIOS flash process.

V

CAUTION!

Do not interrupt the BIOS flash process after it has started. If the process is interrupted, the system BIOS may be permanently corrupted.


RX300


Ê

After completion of the flash process, remove the USB stick and restart the server.

BIOS recovery procedure

I


Ê

Prepare a USB stick with the following files:

– Update tool

– Startup.nsh (which will execute the update tool)

– BIOS image file for update (16 MB with header information)

Ê

Ensure that the server has been shut down and disconnected from the

mains as described in section "Shutting down the server" on page 63 .

Ê

Open the side / top cover as described in section "Opening the server" on page 69 .

Ê

Enter BIOS recovery mode using the onboard jumpers.

I

For detailed information on jumper settings, refer to section "Onboard settings" on page 533

.

Ê

Close the side / top cover as described in section

"Closing the server" on page 73 .

Ê


Ê

Connect the server to the mains as described in section

"Connecting the server to the mains" on page 78 .

Ê

Press the On / Off button to start up the server.

The system will detect the USB stick and the BIOS recovery process will be performed.

V

CAUTION!

Do not interrupt the BIOS recovery process after it has started. If the process is interrupted, the system BIOS may be permanently corrupted.

Ê

After completion of the flash process, shut down the server.

Ê

Open the side / top cover as described in section "Opening the server" on page 69 .

Ê

Disable BIOS recovery mode using the onboard jumpers:

RX300 S7



I

For detailed information on jumper settings, refer to section

"Onboard settings" on page 533 .

Ê

Close the side / top cover as described in section

"Closing the server" on page 73

.

5.2.1.2

Updating or recovering the iRMC iRMC flash procedure

I


Ê

Prepare a USB stick including the bootable iRMC firmware update image.

Ê


I

Ensure that only the USB device with the iRMC firmware is connected to the USB port. Remove all other USB devices temporarily.

Ê

Restart the server.

Ê

The system will detect the USB stick.

I

If the BIOS cannot identify the USB stick, the pop-up message

Failed to boot for Emergency flash. Please Reset now

. will show up in the center of the screen.

Ê

Choose one of the following options from the update tool menu to start the iRMC update process:

Normal Choose this option to update an existing system board.

Initial Choose this option if the system board has been replaced proir to the iRMC update procedure. This option will perform all relevant flash procedures in a row, including the iRMC firmware and bootloader.

V

CAUTION!

Do not interrupt the iRMC upgrade process after it has started. If the process is interrupted, the iRMC BIOS may be permanently corrupted.

I

If the iRMC does not work after flashing, disconnect the system from the mains and reconnect it again.

Ê

After completion of the flash process, remove the USB stick and restart the server.


RX300

Basic software procedures iRMC recovery procedure

I


Ê

Prepare a USB stick including the bootable iRMC firmware update image.

Ê

Ensure that the server has been shut down and disconnected from the

mains as described in section "Shutting down the server" on page 63 .

Ê


I

Ensure that only the USB device with the iRMC firmware is connected to the USB port. Remove all other USB devices temporarily.

Ê

Connect the server to the mains while pushing the ID button on the front panel. Ask a second person to help you if necessary.

Ê

Ensure that the Global Error indicator and the ID indicator are flashing to indicate that the server is entering the iRMC recovery state.

Ê

Press the Power On / Off button. The system starts the POST process.

I

In iRMC reocovery mode, the “FUJITSU” logo does not show up.

Ê

The system will detect the USB stick.

I

If the BIOS cannot identify the USB stick, the pop-up message

Failed to boot for Emergency flash. Please Reset now

. will show up in the center of the screen.

Ê

Choose the Recovery_L option from the update tool menu to start the iRMC update process.

V

CAUTION!

Do not interrupt the iRMC upgrade process after it has started. If the process is interrupted, the iRMC BIOS may be permanently corrupted.

I

If the iRMC does not work after flashing, disconnect the system from the mains and reconnect it again.

Ê

Shut down the server by pressing the power On / Off button.

Ê

Disconnect the server from the mains to exit the iRMC recovery state.

RX300 S7



5.2.2

Verifying system information backup / restore

To avoid the loss of non-default settings when replacing the system board, a backup copy of important system configuration data is automatically stored from the system board NVRAM to the Chassis ID EPROM. After replacing the system board the backup data is restored from the Chassis ID board to the new system board.

In order to verify whether the backup or restore process has been successful, check the System Event Log (SEL) using the ServerView Operations Manager

(see also section

"Viewing and clearing the System Event Log (SEL)" on page 103 ).

After replacing the system board

Ê

Check the SEL log files as described in section

"Viewing and clearing the

System Event Log (SEL)" on page 103

to verify whether the backup data on the Chassis ID EPROM has been restored to the system board:

Chassis IDPROM: Restore successful

After replacing the Chassis ID EPROM

I

In case of the PRIMERGY RX300 S7 server, the Chassis ID EPROM is integrated on the front panel board.

Ê

Check the SEL log files as described in section

"Viewing and clearing the

System Event Log (SEL)" on page 103

to verify whether a backup copy of the system board settings has been transferred to the Chassis ID EPROM:

Chassis IDPROM: Backup successful


RX300


5.2.3

Updating RAID controller firmware

After replacing the RAID controller, it is essential to upgrade the firmware to the latest version. The latest RAID controller firmware version is available from the

Fujitsu support web pages at:


(EMEA market)

http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/downloads/

(Japanese market)

I

Fujitsu does not assume responsibility for any damage done to the server or for the loss of any data resulting from firmware updates.


Using the ServerView Update Manager

For a detailed description on how to update the RAID controller firmware using the ServerView Update Manager or Update Manager Express (UME), please refer to the following manuals available online at


or from the ServerView Suite DVD 2 supplied with your PRIMERGY server:

– ServerView Update Manager:

"ServerView Update Management" user guide

– ServerView Update Manager Express:

"Local System Update for PRIMERGY Servers" user guide

Using the flash tool

The latest firmware files are available as ASPs (Autonomous Support

Packages) for Windows or as DOS tools from the Fujitsu support web pages at


.

Ê

Select Drivers & Downloads.

Ê

From the Select Product drop down lists, choose your PRIMERGY server or enter its serial or ident number into the search field.

Ê

Select your operating system and version.

Ê

Select the desired component type (e.g. SAS RAID).

Ê

Select your controller from the device list to expand a compilation of available drivers and firmware.

Ê

Select the desired file and click Download for further instructions.

RX300 S7



5.2.4

Enabling Option ROM scan

In order to configure an expansion card that has been installed or replaced, the card’s Option ROM has to be enabled in the system board BIOS. The card’s firmware is called by the system BIOS upon reboot and can be entered and configured.

Option ROM can be enabled permanently (e.g. in case of a boot controller that may require frequent setup) or temporarily for one-time configuration. When permanently enabling a controllers’s Option ROM, keep in mind that only two

Option ROMs can be activated in the system board BIOS at a time.

Ê

Enter the BIOS.

Ê

From the Advanced menu select Option ROM Configuration.

Ê

Identify the desired PCI slot and set its Launch Slot # OpROM setting to

Enabled.

Ê


I

Up to two Option ROMs can be activated in the system board BIOS at a time.


When the enabled expansion card is initialized during the POST phase of the boot sequence, a key combination is displayed temporarily to enter the expansion card’s firmware.

Ê

Press the displayed key combination.

Ê

Modify the expansion card firmware options as desired.

Ê

Save your changes and exit the firmware.

I

The expansion card’s option ROM can now be disabled in the system board BIOS.

Exception: If the expansion card controls a permanent boot device, the card’s Option ROM has to remain enabled.


RX300


5.2.5

Verifying and configuring the backup software solution

I

This task only applies to the Japanese market.

Disabling backup drives

Depending on the backup software solution, it may be necessary to disable or delete the backup drive from the backup software drive list and reconfigure backup jobs after completing the maintenance task.

This is the case for the following backup software solutions:

– Netvault for Windows

– ARCServe

– BackupExec

I

Procedures may differ depending on the backup software. For details, refer to the dedicated documentation provided separately.

Further information on suitable backup software solutions and related documentation is available to Fujitsu service partners from the Fujitsu

Extranet pages.

Re-enabling backup drives

If a backup drive has been disabled or deleted from the backup software drive list as described in section

5.1.4 on page 86

, it has to be re-enabled to complete the maintenance task.

Ê

Re-enable backup drives and revise backup software settings and cronjobs.

I

Detailed information on suitable backup software solutions and related documentation is available to Fujitsu service partners from the

Fujitsu Extranet pages

RX300 S7



5.2.6

Resetting the boot retry counter

The boot retry counter is decremented from its preset value every time the

POST watchdog initiates a system reboot. When the value has reached ’0’, the system will shut down and power off.

5.2.6.1

Viewing the boot retry counter

The current boot retry counter status is available in the BIOS:

Ê

Enter the BIOS.

Ê


Ê

Under Boot Retry Counter the current number of remaining boot attempts is displayed. The value is further decremented with every failed boot attempt or system reboot resulting from critical system errors.

Ê

Exit the BIOS.

5.2.6.2

Resetting the boot retry counter

The boot retry counter should be reset to its original value concluding every service task.

I

Please note, if the customer does not know about the original boot retry values:

If the system boots up and no further errors occur within 6 hours after that successful boot attempt, the boot retry counter will automatically be reset to its default value. Please take into account, that the specified number of boot attempts can only be determined after this period of time.

If the customer knows about the original boot retry values, proceed as follows to reset or configure the boot retry counter:

Resetting the boot retry counter in the BIOS

Ê

Enter the BIOS.

Ê


Ê

Under Boot Retry Counter press the [+] or [-]keys to specify the maximum number of boot attempts (0 to 7).

Ê

Exit the BIOS.


RX300


Resetting the boot retry counter using the ServerView Operations

Manager

Ê

In the ServerView Operations Manager Administration view, select Server

Configuration.

Ê

If more than one server is managed in SVOM, select the target server and click Next.

Ê

From the Server Configuration menu pane, choose Restart Options.

Ê

Under Reboot Retries, specify the maximum number of boot attempts (0 to 7) in the Default for reboot tries field.

Resetting the boot retry counter using iRMC web frontend

Ê


Ê


Ê

The following boot retry counter settings are available under ASR&R Options:

Ê

Under Retry counter max specify the maximum number of attempts to boot the operating system (0 to 7).

Ê

Under Retry counter the current number of remaining boot attempts is displayed. Overwrite this value with the maximum number of boot attempts specified above in order to reset the boot retry counter.

Ê


I





RX300 S7



5.2.7

Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality

If ServerView Operation Manager boot watchdog functionality has been

disabled for firmware upgrade purposes (see section 5.1.2 on page 84 ), it has

to be re-enabled to complete the maintenance task.

Timer settings can be configured in the BIOS or using the ServerView iRMC web frontend:

Configuring boot watchdog settings in the BIOS

Ê

Enter the BIOS.

Ê


Ê

Under Boot Watchdog set the Action setting to Reset.

Ê


I


Configuring boot watchdog settings using the iRMC web frontend

Ê


Ê


Ê

Under Watchdog Settings ensure that the check box next to Boot Watchdog is selected. From the drop down list choose Reset and specify the desired timeout delay.

Ê


I






RX300


5.2.8

Enabling replaced components in the system BIOS

When a processor, an expansion card, or a memory module fails, the defective component will be set to Disabled or Failed in the system BIOS. The server will then reboot with only the intact hardware components remaining in the system configuration. After replacing the defective component, it needs to be reenabled in the system board BIOS.

Ê

Enter the BIOS.

Ê

Select the Advanced menu.

Ê

Select the status menu of the desired component:

– Processors: CPU Status

I

This option is only available for multi-processor systems.

– Memory: Memory Status

– Expansion cards: PCI Status

Ê

Reset replaced components to Enable.

Ê


I


5.2.9

Verifying the memory mode

If a memory module fails, the server will reboot and the defective module will be disabled. As a result, the current operation mode (e.g. Mirrored Channel mode) may no longer be available due to a lack of identical memory module pairs. In this case, the operation mode will automatically revert to Independent Channel

Mode.

I

For detailed information on memory operation modes available for your server, refer to section

"Memory sequence" on page 264 .

After replacing the defective module(s) the memory operation mode is automatically reset to its original state. It is recommended to verify that the operation mode has been correctly.

RX300 S7



Ê

Enter the BIOS.

Ê


Ê

Under Memory Status verify that none of the memory modules are marked as

Failed.

Ê

Save your changes (if applicable) and exit the BIOS.

I


5.2.10 Verifying the system time settings

I

This task only applies to Linux environments.

After the system board has been replaced, the system time is set automatically.

By default, the RTC (Real Time Clock) time standard is set as the local time.

If a Linux OS is used and the hardware clock has been configured as UTC

(Universal Time, Coordinated) in the operating system, the BMC local time may not be mapped correctly.

Ê

After replacing the system board, ask the system administrator whether the

RTC or UTC time standard is to be used as system time.

I

If the system time (RTC) is set to UTC, the SEL (System Event Log) time stamps may differ from the local time.

Ê

Enter the BIOS.

Ê

Select the Main menu.

Ê

Under System Time and System Date specify the correct time and date.

I

By default, the system time set in the BIOS is RTC (Real Time Clock) local time. If your IT infrastructure relies on universally accepted time standards, set the System Time to UTC (Universal Time, Coordinated) instead. Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) can be considered equivalent to UTC.

Ê


I



RX300


5.2.11 Viewing and clearing the System Event Log (SEL)

5.2.11.1 Viewing the SEL

You can view the System Event Log (SEL) using the ServerView Operations

Manager or the ServerView iRMC web frontend:

Viewing the SEL in ServerView Operations Manager

Ê

In ServerView Operations Manager Single System View select Maintenance from the Information / Operation menu.

Ê

Under Maintenance select System Event Log.

Ê

Select the message type(s) you want to display:

– Critical events

– Major events

– Minor events

– Informational events

I

Note on the SVOM Driver Monitor

The Driver Monitor view gives you an overview of the monitored components as well as the associated events contained in the system event log on the managed server.

Under Monitored Components the monitored components are listed. If a component has the status Warning or Error, you can select it in the list and click Acknowledge. This confirms the event on the server side. You may have to log on to the server beforehand. The status of the component will then be reset to ok. To see the new status you must refresh the Driver Monitor view with Refresh.

I

For detailed information on how to view and sort the SEL using

ServerView Operations Manager, refer to the "ServerView Operations

Manager - Server Management" user guide.

Viewing the SEL using the iRMC web frontend

Ê


Ê

Select the Event Log and choose the Internal Event Log submenu.

RX300 S7



Ê

Under Internal Event Log Content the SEL is being displayed. In order to filter the list, select the check boxes next to the desired event types and press

Apply for the changes to take effect.

I





5.2.11.2 Clearing the SEL

You can clear the System Event Log (SEL) using the ServerView iRMC web frontend:

Ê


Ê

Select the Event Log and choose the Internal Event Log submenu.

Ê

Under Internal Event Log Information click Clear Internal Event Log to clear the

SEL.

I





5.2.12 Updating the NIC configuration file in a Linux environment

In order to prevent errors caused by changing network device names (eth<x>), it is recommended to store the MAC address (hardware address) of a network interface card in the related NIC configuration file of the Linux OS.

When replacing a network controller or the system board with onboard LAN controllers in a server running Linux OS, the MAC address will change but not automatically be updated in the definition file.

In order to prevent communication problems, it is necessary to update the changed MAC address stored in the related ifcfg-eth<x> definition file.

To update the MAC address, proceed as follows:

I

Procedures may differ depending on your Linux OS or the definition file on the client system. Use the following information as reference. Ask the system administrator to change the definition file.


RX300


Ê

After replacing a network controller or the system board, switch on and boot the server as described in section

"Switching on the server" on page 79 .

kudzu, the hardware configuration tool for Red Hat Linux, will launch at boot and detect the new and / or changed hardware on your system.

I

kudzu may not launch at boot depending on the client’s environment.

Ê

Select Keep Configuration and Ignore to complete the boot process.

Ê

Use the vi text editor to specify the MAC address in the HWADDR section of the ifcfg-eth<x> file:

I

The MAC address can be found on the type label attached to the system board or network controller.

Example:

In order to modify the definition file for network controller 1, enter the following command:

# vi /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-eth1

In vi, specify the new MAC address as follows:

HWADDR=xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx

Ê

Save and close the definition file.

Ê

For the changes to take effect, you need to reboot the network by entering the following command:

# service network restart

I

If the system board or network controller offers multiple LAN ports, it is necessary to update the remaining ifcfg-eth<x> definition files accordingly.

Ê

Update the NIC configuration file to reflect the new card sequence and MAC address.

RX300 S7



5.2.13 Enabling BitLocker functionality

If BitLocker Drive Encryption has been disabled for maintenance purposes (see section

"Disabling BitLocker functionality" on page 83 ), it has to be re-enabled

to complete the service task.

I

If BitLocker Drive Encryption has been disabled prior to replacing components you won't be asked for a recovery key when rebooting the server after the maintenance task. However, if BitLocker functionality has not been disabled, Windows will enter recovery mode and ask you to input recovery key for further booting.

Ê

In this case, ask the system administrator to enter the recovery key in order to boot the operating system.

Ê

Ask the system administrator to enable BitLocker-protection on the operating system drive, using the BitLocker setup wizard available either from the Control Panel or Windows Explorer.

Ê

Open Bitlocker Drive Encryption by clicking the Start button, clicking


Encryption.

I

Administrator permission required: If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the password or provide confirmation.

Ê

To enable a temporarily disabled BitLocker, click Turn On BitLocker.

Ê

Follow the instructions in the BitLocker Setup wizard.

I

For further information on how to enable BitLocker drive encryption, please refer to the Microsoft Knowledge Base.

Fujitsu service partners will find additional information (also available in

Japanese) on the Fujitsu Extranet web pages.


RX300


5.2.14 Performing a RAID array rebuild

After replacing a hard disk drive that has been combined into a RAID array,

RAID rebuild will be performed completely unattended as a background process.

Figure 23: Progress bar (RAID array rebuild)

V

CAUTION!

The system is now operational, however, data redundancy will not be available until the RAID array rebuild is complete. Depending on the hard disk drive capacity the overall process can take up to several hours, in some cases even days.

I

You may notice a slight performance impact during rebuild.

5.2.15 Looking up changed MAC / WWN addresses

When replacing a network controller or SFP+ transceiver module, the MAC

(Media Access Control) and WWN (World Wide Name) addresses will change.

I

In addition to the procedures described below, MAC / WWN addresses can also be found on the type label attached to a network controller or system board.

5.2.15.1 Looking up MAC addresses

Ê

Enter the BIOS.

Ê

Depending on the number of network controllers in your system, you will find one or several Port Configuration menu items.

Use the arrow key ç to scroll to the right and browse all available tabs.

Each Port Configuration tab will display detailed information on the related network controller, including its MAC address.

Ê

Note down the new 12-digit MAC address.

RX300 S7



Ê

Press [Esc] to exit the BIOS.

Ê

Inform the customer about the changed MAC address.

5.2.15.2 Looking up WWN addresses

Emulex FC / FCoE adapters

Ê

Enable the network controller’s Option ROM in the system board BIOS as described in section

"Enabling Option ROM scan" on page 96

.

Ê

Restart the server.

Ê

During boot, as soon as the Emulex BIOS utility option appears, press

[ALT]

+[E] or [CTRL]+[E].

Ê

Under Emulex Adapters in the System you will find all available Emulex adapters and their WWN addresses.

Ê

Note down the new 16-digit WWN address.

Ê

Press [Esc] to exit the Emulex BIOS utility.

Ê

Inform the customer about the changed WWN address.

QLogic FC adapters

Ê

Enable the network controller’s Option ROM in the system board BIOS as described in section

"Enabling Option ROM scan" on page 96

.

Ê

Restart the server.

Ê

During boot, as soon as the QLogic BIOS utility option appears, press

[ALT]

+[Q] or [CTRL]+[Q].

Ê

Under Select Host Adapter use the arrow keys æ/Ë to select the desired

FC / FCoE adapter and press [Enter].

Ê

From the Fast!UTIL Options menu, select Configuration Settings, and press

[Enter]

.

Ê

From the Configuration Settings menu, select Adapter Settings, and press

[Enter]

.

Ê

Note down the new 16-digit WWN address found under Adapter Port Name.

Ê

Press [Esc] to return to the main menu and exit the QLogic BIOS utility.

Ê

Inform the customer about the changed WWN address.


RX300


5.2.16 Using the Chassis ID Prom Tool

The Chassis ID EPROM located on a dedicated Chassis ID board or on your server’s front panel board contains system information like server name and model, housing type, serial number and manufacturing data.

In order to integrate your system into the ServerView management environment and to enable server installation using the ServerView Installation Manager, system data needs to be complete and correct.

After replacing the Chassis ID EPROM, system information has to be entered using the ChassisId_Prom Tool. The tool and further instructions are available to maintenance personnel from the Fujitsu Technology Solutions Extranet:

http://partners.ts.fujitsu.com/com/service/intelservers/tools

I


5.2.17 Configuring LAN teaming

Use ServerView Operations Manager to obtain detailed information on existing

LAN teams:

Ê

In ServerView Operations Manager Single System View select System Status from the Information / Operation menu.

Ê

Under Network Interfaces select LAN Teaming.

Ê

The Network Interfaces (Summary) overview shows all configured LAN teams and their components. Choose a LAN team to display further details:

– LAN Team Properties: Properties of the selected LAN team

– LAN Team Statistics: Available statistics about the selected LAN team

I

For more detailed information, refer to the "ServerView Operations

Manager - Server Management" user guide.

5.2.17.1 After replacing / upgrading LAN controllers

Please note when re-using a replaced LAN controller:

Ê

Confirm with the customer whether the LAN controller you have replaced has been used as part of a LAN teaming configuration.

RX300 S7



Ê

If LAN teaming has been active, you will need to restore the configuration using the LAN driver utility after replacing the LAN controller.

Ensure that the controllers have been assigned as primary or secondary according to your requirements.

I

For details, refer to the relevant LAN driver manual.

5.2.17.2 After replacing the system board

Ê

Confirm with the customer whether the onboard LAN controller you have replaced has been used as part of a LAN teaming configuration.

Ê

If LAN teaming has been active, you will need to restore the configuration using the LAN driver utility after replacing the system board.

I

For details, refer to the relevant LAN driver manual.

5.2.18 Switching off the ID indicator

Press the ID button on the front panel or use ServerView Operations Manager to switch off the ID indicator after the maintenance task has been concluded successfully.

I

For further information, refer to section

"Locating the defective server" on page 54

or to the "ServerView Suite Local Service Concept (LSC)" manual available from the ServerView Suite DVD 2 supplied with your



(EMEA market) or


(Japanese market).

Using the ID button on the front panel

Ê

Press the ID button on the front panel to switch off the ID indicators.

Using ServerView Operations Manager

Ê

In ServerView Operations Manager Single System View and press the Locate button in the title bar to switch off the ID indicator.


RX300


5.2.19 Specifying the chassis model

In order to have your server displayed correctly as a rack system in the

ServerView management user interface after a chassis conversion, the chassis model setting needs to be updated.

This can be accomplished using the ServerView Installation Manager or

Maintenance Tools:

Using the ServerView Installation Manager

Ê

Boot the system from the ServerView Suite DVD 1. The ServerView

Installation Manager is being started.

Ê

Select your preferred user interface language.

Ê

Under Status backup media select No status backup and click Continue.

Ê

Select Maintenance.

Ê

Select Server Configuration Manager.

Ê

Check the box for rack model and save the setting by clicking Save.

Using the ServerView Maintenance Tools

On Windows-based servers with ServerView agents installed, proceed as follows:

Ê

Click Start, point to All Programs, and then point to Fujitsu - ServerView Suite -

Agents - Maintenance Tools.

Ê

In the Maintenance Tools menu pane, click the Chassis Model Configuration tab.

Ê

Under Convert to click the Rack Model button.

Ê

Click Exit to close the Maintenance Tools menu pane.

I

For more detailed information on installing ServerView agents, refer to the "ServerView Operations Manager - Installation ServerView Agents for Windows" user guide available online at



RX300 S7




RX300

6 Power supply

The PRIMERGY RX300 S7 server can be equipped with up to two hot-plug

PSU modules that automatically adjust to any mains voltage in the range of

100 VAC to 240 VAC. Power redundancy is possible in with two PSUs . The effective power of the PSUs may not differ.

V

CAUTION!

The server supports a mains voltage in the range of 100 VAC to

240 VAC. You may only operate the server if its rated voltage range corresponds to the local mains voltage.

Safety notes

V

CAUTION!

●

Do not disassemble the power supply unit. Doing so may cause electric shock.

●

●

Areas around the power supply unit may remain extremely hot after shutdown. After shutting down the server, wait for hot components to cool down before removing the power supply unit.

The power supply unit is heavy, so handle it carefully. If you drop it by mistake, injuries may result.

●


I

Note for servers using CMA (Cable Management Arm)

Since the installed CMA is blocking PSU modules, additional steps are required in order to remove or replace PSU modules:

Ê

Unlock the CMA stopper.

Ê

Remove the CMA stopper with the mounted crossbar.

Ê

Support the CMA stopper, the crossbar and the CMA arm including cables with your right hand.

Ê

Remove the PSU module and install a PSU dummy module into the empty bay.

Ê

Remount the complete assembly (CMA stopper, crossbar and CMA arm) into the rail.

RX300 S7


Power supply

6.1

Installing PSU modules



6.1.1

Required tools

●

●

Preliminary and concluding steps: tool-less

Installing the power supply unit :tool-less

6.1.2


Perform the following procedures:

Ê


Ê



RX300

6.1.3

Removing a PSU dummy module

Power supply

Figure 24: Removing the PSU dummy module

Ê

Press in on both locking latches on the PSU dummy module (1) and carefully detach the dummy module from its slot (2).

Ê

Remove the dummy module from its slot.

V

CAUTION!

Keep the dummy cover for future use. If a power supply module is removed and not immediately replaced by a new one, a PSU dummy cover must be replaced in the slot to comply with applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements.

RX300 S7


Power supply

6.1.4

Installing a PSU module

Figure 25: Installing the PSU

Ê

Insert the PSU module into its slot.

Ê

Push the PSU module into its slot (1) as far as it will go until the locking latch snaps in place (2).

V

CAUTION!

Ensure that the PSU module properly engages in its slot and is locked in position in order to prevent it from sliding out of the chassis during transportation.

Ê

If applicable, fold down the handle on the PSU module (3).

6.1.5

Concluding steps


Ê


Ê

"Closing the rack door" on page 81


RX300

Power supply

Ê


6.2

Removing PSU modules



6.2.1

Required tools

●

●


Removing the power supply unit: tool-less

6.2.2



Ê


Ê


Ê

In non-redundant PSU configurations, shut down the server as described in section


.

Ê


RX300 S7


Power supply

6.2.3

Removing a PSU module

Figure 26: Removing the PSU

Ê

Press in on the green locking latch (1).

Ê

Fold up the handle on the PSU module (2).

Ê

While keeping the green locking latch pressed, pull the PSU module out of its slot (3).


RX300

6.2.4

Installing a PSU dummy module

Power supply

Figure 27: Installing a PSU dummy module

Ê

Insert the PSU dummy module into the empty PSU slot with the impressed arrow symbol facing up.

Ê

Press in on both locking latches on the PSU dummy module (1) and carefully insert the dummy module into its slot (2) until it locks in place.

V

CAUTION!

Always install dummy modules into unused PSU slots to comply with applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements.

6.2.5



Ê


Ê


Ê


RX300 S7


Power supply

6.3

Replacing PSU modules



6.3.1

Required tools

●

●


Replacing the power supply unit: tool-less

6.3.2



Ê

"Disabling BitLocker functionality" on page 83

Ê


Ê


Ê

In non-redundant PSU configurations, shut down the server as described in

section "Shutting down the server" on page 63 .

Ê


6.3.3

Removing the defective PSU module

Ê

Identify the defective PSU module using the server management software.

Ê

Remove the defective PSU module as described in section "Removing a

PSU module" on page 118 .


RX300

6.3.4

Installing the new PSU module

Power supply


Ê


Ê


V

CAUTION!


Ê


6.3.5



Ê


Ê


Ê


RX300 S7


Power supply

6.4

Upgrading PSU from 450 W to 800 W



6.4.1

Required tools

●

●



6.4.2



Ê


Ê


Ê

In non-redundant PSU configurations, shut down the server as described in

section "Shutting down the server" on page 63 .

Ê


6.4.3

Removing the PSU module

V

CAUTION!

If you want to upgrade the PSU from 450W to 800 W hot-plug the running of the mixed configuration must not exceed 5 minutes.

Ê

"Removing a PSU module" on page 118


RX300

6.4.4

Installing the new PSU module

Power supply


Ê


Ê


V

CAUTION!


Ê


6.4.5



Ê


Ê


Ê


RX300 S7


Power supply

6.5

Replacing the power backplane



6.5.1

Required tools

●

●



6.5.2


Perform the following steps:

Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê

"Extending the server out of the rack" on page 66

If further required, remove the server from the rack as described in section

"Removing the server from the rack" on page 67 .

Ê

"Removing the server cover" on page 69

Ê

"Removing the air duct" on page 70


RX300

6.5.3

Disconnecting power cables

Power supply

Figure 30: Disconnecting cables from the power backplane

Ê

Remove the cables from the power backplane.

RX300 S7


Power supply

6.5.4

Removing the power backplane

Figure 31: Removing the power backplane (A)

Ê

Unlock the locking mechanism of the power backplane.

Figure 32: Removing the power backplane (B)


RX300

Ê

Fold the power backplane in the direction of the arrow.

Power supply

Figure 33: Removing the power backplane (C)

Ê

Push the power backplane upward.

Ê

Remove the power backplane.

RX300 S7


Power supply

6.5.5

Installing the power backplane

Figure 34: Installing the power backplane (A)

Ê

Insert the new power backplane into the guiding hooks of the chassis (1).

Figure 35: Installing the power backplane (B)

Ê

Slide the power backplane downward in the guiding hooks.


RX300

Power supply

Figure 36: Locking the power backplane

Ê

Press the power backplane in the direction of the arrow to lock it.

RX300 S7


Power supply

6.5.6

Reconnecting power cables

Figure 37: Connecting power cables (A)

Ê

Connect the cables.

6.5.7



Ê

"Installing the air duct" on page 71

Ê

"Mounting the server cover" on page 73

Ê

"Sliding the server into the rack" on page 77

If the server has been completely removed from the rack for maintenance purposes, reinstall and secure it in the rack as described in section

"Mounting the server in the rack" on page 74 .

Ê


Ê


Ê



RX300

7 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Safety notes

V

CAUTION!

●

The hard disk drive must not be removed from the installation frame by anyone except a service technician.

●

●

●

●

HDD / SSD modules must all be marked clearly so that they can be reinstalled into their original mounting locations after an upgrade.

Otherwise, data may be lost.

Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold the metallic areas or the edges of the circuit boards.

Before removing a hard disk drive, wait for about 30 seconds until the disk has stopped spinning completely.

When a hard disk drive is starting up, a resonant noise may be audible for a short while. This does not indicate a failure.

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Depending on the OS, you can configure the write cache settings for the hard disk drives. If a power failure should occur while the write cache is enabled, cached data may be lost.

When disposing of, transferring, or returning a hard disk or solid state drive, wipe out the data on the drive for your own security.

Rough handling of hard disk drives may damage the stored data. To cope with any unexpected problems, always back up important data.

When backing up data to another hard disk drive, you should make backups on a file or partition basis.

Handle the device on a shock and vibration free surface.

Do not use the device in extremely hot or cold locations, or locations with extreme temperature changes.

Never attempt to disassemble a hard disk or solid state drive.


RX300 S7


Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.1

Basic procedure

– Solid state drives (SSDs) are always equipped before installing hard disk drives.

– Hard disk drives / solid state drives with different capacities are installed from highest to lowest capacity.

– Hard disk drives with different rotation speeds are installed from highest to lowest speed.

– When installing hard disk drives with different bus technologies (SAS or

SATA), first install SAS drives and then SATA drives.

– Please refer to sections

"Mounting order for 2.5-inch HDDs / SSDs" on page 140

and "Mounting order for 3.5-inch HDDs" on page 132 for a

complete overview of the mounting sequence.

– Install dummy modules into unused HDD / SSD bays.

7.2

3.5-inch hard disk drives

7.2.1

Mounting order for 3.5-inch HDDs

Maximum configuration: 6x 3.5-inch HDDs

Figure 38: 3.5-inch HDD / SSD mounting order

HDD / SSD naming scheme

I

The HDD numbering as listed in the ServerView RAID Manager differs from the HDD mounting order:


RX300


HDD

1

3

5

RAID

Manager #

[0]

[1]

[2]

Channel

1

1

1

Table 4: HDD naming scheme

3.5-inch HDDs log.

Drive #

0

1

2

HDD

2

4

6

RAID

Manager #

[4]

[5]

[6]

Channel

2

2

2

log.

Drive #

0

1

2

tape

Figure 39: 3.5-inch HDD / SSD mounting order with tape


I

The HDD numbering as listed in the ServerView RAID Manager differs from the HDD mounting order:

HDD

RAID

Manager #

Channel

1

3

[0]

[1]

1

1


3.5-inch HDDs log.

Drive #

0

1

HDD

2

4

RAID

Manager #

[4]

[5]

Channel

2

2

log.

Drive #

0

1

7.2.2

Installing 3.5-inch HDD modules



RX300 S7



●

●

7.2.2.1

Required tools


Installing a 3.5-inch HDD module: tool-less

7.2.2.2



Ê


Ê

Locate the correct drive bay as described in section

"Mounting order for 3.5inch HDDs" on page 132

.

7.2.2.3

Removing a 3.5-inch HDD dummy module

Figure 40: Removing a 3.5-inch dummy module

I

Dummy modules have been installed into unused HDD bays. Before installing an additional HDD, the dummy module needs to be removed from the desired drive bay.

Ê

Press in on the locking tabs on both sides of the dummy module to disengage the locking mechanism (1).

Ê

While keeping the locking tabs pressed, pull the dummy module out of its bay (2).

V

CAUTION!

Save the dummy module for future use.


RX300


Always replace dummy modules into unused HDD bays to comply with applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements.

7.2.2.4

Installing a 3.5-inch HDD module

Figure 41: Opening the 3.5-inch HDD module locking lever

Ê

While pressing down on the locking button (1) fold up the lever (2).

Figure 42: Inserting the 3.5-inch HDD module

RX300 S7



Ê

Insert the HDD module into a drive bay and carefully push back as far as it will go (1).

Ê

Fold down the lever to lock the HDD module in place (2).

7.2.2.5



Ê

Please observe the notes on RAID rebuild in section "Performing a RAID array rebuild" on page 107

.

Ê


7.2.3

Removing 3.5-inch HDD modules



●

●

7.2.3.1

Required tools


Removing a 3.5-inch HDD module: tool-less

7.2.3.2


Prform the following procedures:

Ê

Ensure that the HDD module to be removed is not combined into a RAID array. If the drive is part of a RAID array, you first need to delete the array using ServerView RAID Manager.

V

CAUTION!

All data on all HDDs in the array will be lost! Be sure to back up your data before deleting a RAID array.


RX300


I

For further information, please refer to the "ServerView Suite RAID

Management" user guide, available online at



Ê


7.2.3.3

Removing a 3.5-inch HDD module

Figure 43: Removing a 3.5-inch HDD module

Ê

While pressing down on the locking button (1) fold up the lever (2).

I

Thereby, the HDD module is pushed out of its drive bay by about 1 cm and disconnected from the SAS / SATA backplane.

Ê

Wait about 30 seconds to allow the hard disk drive to spin down.

Ê

Pull the HDD module completely out of its bay.

RX300 S7



7.2.3.4

Installing a 3.5-inch HDD dummy module

V

CAUTION!

If the removed HDD module is not replaced immediately, always replace a dummy module into the unused HDD / SSD bay to comply with applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements.

Figure 44: Installing a 3.5-inch HDD dummy module

Ê

Slide the HDD dummy module into the drive bay until it locks in place.

7.2.3.5



Ê



RX300


7.2.4

Replacing a 3.5-inch HDD module



V

CAUTION!

●

Only remove an HDD / SSD module during operation if the drive is not currently being accessed. Observe the indicators for the corresponding HDD / SSD modules, see "PRIMERGY RX300 S7

Server - Operating manual".

●

Under no circumstances should you remove an HDD / SSD module while the system is in operation if you are not sure that the drive is operated by a RAID controller and belongs to a disk array that is operating in RAID level 0, 1, 1E, 10, 5, 50, 6 or 60.

An HDD / SSD module can only be replaced during operation in conjunction with a corresponding RAID configuration.

●

All HDD / SSD modules (drives) must be uniquely identified so that they can be reinstalled in their original mounting locations later. If this is not done, existing data can be lost.

●

●

7.2.4.1

Required tools


Replacing a 3.5-inch HDD module: tool-less

7.2.4.2



Ê


Ê


Ê

Locate the defective HDD module as described in section "Local diagnostic indicators on the front" on page 58 .

RX300 S7



Only applicable for removing intact HDD modules:

Ê

Before removing a non-defective HDD module, put the drive into "Offline" mode using your RAID configuration software.

I





7.2.4.3

Removing a 3.5-inch HDD module

Ê

"Removing a 3.5-inch HDD module" on page 137

7.2.4.4

Installing a 3.5-inch HDD module

Ê

"Installing 3.5-inch HDD modules" on page 133

7.2.4.5



Ê

Please observe the notes on RAID rebuild in section "Performing a RAID array rebuild" on page 107

.

Ê


7.3

2.5-inch hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.3.1

Mounting order for 2.5-inch HDDs / SSDs

Maximum configuration: 16x 2.5-inch HDDs / SSDs

General equipping rules

– Solid state drives (SSDs) are always equipped before installing hard disk drives.

– If only one HDD/SSD module is installed, the HDD/SSD module will be installed in position 1. Empty bays must be equipped with a dummy module.


RX300


Figure 45: 2.5-inch HDD / SSD mounting order configuration 2 and 3


I

The HDD / SSD numbering as listed in the ServerView RAID Manager differs from the HDD mounting order:

2.5-inch HDDs / SSDs

HDD RAID Manager # Channel

1

[0]

1

2

3

4

[1]

[2]

[3]

1

1

1


log. Drive #

0

1

2

3

Figure 46: 2.5-inch HDD / SSD mounting order configuration 4

RX300 S7






I


HDD

5

7

1

3

RAID

Manager

#

[0]

[1]

[2]

[3]

Channel

2.5-inch HDDs / SSDs log.

Drive #

HDD

RAID

Manager

#

1

1

1

1

0

1

2

3

2

4

6

8

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]


Channel

2

2

2

2

log.

Drive #

0

1

2

3


RX300




I


10

11

12

7

8

5

6

9


HDD RAID Manager #

3

4

1

2

[0]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8]

[9]

[10]

11


RX300 S7





I


10

11

12

13

7

8

5

6

9


HDD RAID Manager #

1

[0]

2

3

4

[12]

[1]

[13]

14

15

16

[2]

[14]

[3]

[15]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8]

[9]

[10]

[11]



RX300


7.3.2

Installing 2.5-inch HDD / SSD modules



●

●

7.3.2.1

Required tools


Installing a 2.5-inch HDD / SSD module: tool-less

7.3.2.2



Ê


Ê

Locate the correct drive bay as described in section "Mounting order for 2.5inch HDDs / SSDs" on page 140 .

RX300 S7



7.3.2.3

Removing a 2.5-inch HDD / SSD dummy module

Figure 51: Removing a 2.5-inch dummy module

I

Dummy modules have been installed into unused HDD / SSD bays.

Before installing an additional HDD / SSD, the dummy module needs to be removed from the desired drive bay.

Ê

Press in on the locking clips on left side of the dummy module to disengage the locking mechanism (1).

Ê

While keeping the locking clip pressed, pull the dummy module out of its bay

(2).

V

CAUTION!

Save the dummy module for future use.

Always replace dummy modules into unused HDD / SSD bays to comply with applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements.


RX300


7.3.2.4

Installing a 2.5-inch HDD / SSD module

Figure 52: Opening the 2.5-inch HDD / SSD module locking lever

Ê

Pinch the green locking clips (1) and open the locking lever (2).

Figure 53: Inserting the 2.5-inch HDD / SSD module

RX300 S7



Ê

Insert the HDD module into a drive bay and carefully push back as far as it will go (1).

Ê

Close the locking lever to lock the hard disk drive in place (2).

7.3.2.5



Ê

"Performing a RAID array rebuild" on page 107

Ê


7.3.3

Removing 2.5-inch HDD / SSD modules



●

●

7.3.3.1

Required tools


Removing a 2.5-inch HDD / SSD module: tool-less

7.3.3.2



Ê

Ensure that the HDD / SSD module to be removed is not combined into a

RAID array. If the drive is part of a RAID array, you first need to delete the array using ServerView RAID Manager.

V

CAUTION!

All data on all HDDs / SSDs in the array will be lost! Be sure to back up your data before deleting a RAID array.

I






RX300


Ê


7.3.3.3

Removing a 2.5-inch HDD / SSD module

Figure 54: Disconnecting a 2.5-inch HDD / SSD module

Ê

Pinch the green locking clips (1) and fully open the locking lever (2).

I

Thereby, the HDD / SSD module is pushed out of its drive bay by about 1 cm and disconnected from the SAS / SATA backplane.

Ê

Wait about 30 seconds to allow the hard disk drive to spin down.

I

This is not necessary when removing a solid state drive.

RX300 S7



Figure 55: Removing a 2.5-inch HDD / SSD module

Ê

Pull the HDD / SSD module completely out of its bay.


RX300


7.3.3.4

Installing a 2.5-inch HDD / SSD dummy module

V

CAUTION!

If the removed HDD / SSD module is not replaced immediately, always replace a dummy module into the unused HDD / SSD bay to comply with applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements.

Figure 56: Installing a 2.5-inch HDD / SSD dummy module

Ê

Slide the HDD / SSD dummy module into the drive bay until it locks in place.

7.3.3.5



Ê


RX300 S7



7.3.4

Replacing a 2.5-inch HDD / SSD module



V

CAUTION!

●

Only remove an HDD / SSD module during operation if the drive is not currently being accessed. Observe the indicators for the corresponding HDD / SSD modules, see "PRIMERGY RX300 S7

Server - Operating manual".

●

Under no circumstances should you remove an HDD / SSD module while the system is in operation if you are not sure that the drive is operated by a RAID controller and belongs to a disk array that is operating in RAID level 0, 1, 1E, 10, 5, 50, 6 or 60.

An HDD / SSD module can only be replaced during operation in conjunction with a corresponding RAID configuration.

●

All HDD / SSD modules (drives) must be uniquely identified so that they can be reinstalled in their original mounting locations later. If this is not done, existing data can be lost.

●

●

7.3.4.1

Required tools


Replacing a 2.5-inch HDD / SSD module: tool-less

7.3.4.2



Ê


Ê


Ê

Locate the defective HDD / SSD module as described in section

"Local diagnostic indicators on the front" on page 58

.


RX300


Only applicable for removing intact HDD / SSD modules:

Ê

Before removing a non-defective HDD / SSD module, put the drive into

"Offline" mode using your RAID configuration software.

7.3.4.3

Removing a 2.5-inch HDD / SSD module

Ê

Remove the HDD / SSD module to be replaced from the server as described in section

"Removing a 2.5-inch HDD / SSD module" on page 149 .

7.3.4.4

Installing a 2.5-inch HDD / SSD module

Ê

Install the new HDD / SSD module into the empty drive bay as described in section

"Installing 2.5-inch HDD / SSD modules" on page 145

.

7.3.4.5



Ê

Please observe the notes on RAID rebuild in section

"Performing a RAID array rebuild" on page 107 .

Ê


7.4

Replacing SAS / SATA HDD / SSD backplanes

7.4.1

Replacing the 3.5-inch HDD SAS / SATA backplane



7.4.1.1

Required tools

●

Preliminary and concluding steps:

– Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

RX300 S7



●

Replacing the SAS / SATA backplane: tool-less

7.4.1.2



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê

Remove all HDD / SSD modules from the server as described in section

"Removing 3.5-inch HDD modules" on page 136

.

V

CAUTION!

Ensure that all hard disk drives are uniquely identified so that you can reinsert them into their original bays after replacing the HDD backplane.

Ê




Ê


Ê


Ê

"Removing the fan box" on page 176


RX300


7.4.1.3

Removing the 3.5-inch HDD SAS / SATA backplane

Figure 57: Disconnecting cables from the 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane

Ê

Disconnect all cables from the 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane:

– SAS cables

– Power cables

RX300 S7



Figure 58: Removing the 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane (A)

Ê

Unlock the 3.5-inch SAS HDD backplane (1) and push the SAS backplane in the direction of the arrow (2) until it unlocks out of the locking noses and the locking mechanism on the bottom of the server.

Ê

Remove the 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane.


RX300


7.4.1.4

Installing the 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane

Figure 59: Installing the 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane (A)

Ê

At a slight angle insert the 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane into the guide (1).

Ê

Fit the 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane on the eight hooks (circles) (2).

Ê

Push the3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane in the direction of the arrow (3).

I

Ensure that the eight hooks project through the recesses in the backplane.

RX300 S7



Figure 60: Installing the 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane (B)

Ê

Reconnect all cables to the 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane:

– Power cable (C5) to connector X10

– Power cable (C3) to connector X9

– SAS cable (C9) to connector X1

– SAS cable (C8) to connector X2

I

For a complete cabling overview, please refer to section

"Cables overview" on page 513 .


RX300


7.4.1.5



Ê

"Installing the fan box" on page 177

Ê


Ê


Ê



"Mounting the server in the rack" on page 74

.

Ê

Reinstall all HDD / SSD modules to their original drive bays as described in section

"Installing 3.5-inch HDD modules" on page 133 .

Ê


Ê


Ê


7.4.2

Replacing the 4x 2.5-inch HDD SAS backplane



7.4.2.1

Required tools

●

●



Replacing the SAS backplane:


7.4.2.2



RX300 S7



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


"Removing 2.5-inch HDD / SSD modules" on page 148 .

V

CAUTION!


Ê




Ê


Ê

"Removing the front cover" on page 489

Ê


Ê



RX300

7.4.2.3

Removing the HDD cage


Figure 61: Disconnecting cables from the 4x 2.5-inch HDD SAS backplane

Ê

Disconnect all cables from the 4x 2.5-inch HDD SAS backplane:

– SAS / SATA cable

– Power cable

Figure 62: Removing the HDD cage

Ê

Remove the screws of the HDD cage.

Ê

Slide the HDD cage frontward out.

RX300 S7



7.4.2.4

Removing the 4x 2.5-inch SAS HDD backplane

Figure 63: Removing the 4x 2.5-inch HDD SAS backplane

Ê

Remove the screw (1).

Ê

Remove the 4x 2.5-inch HDD SAS backplane (2).


RX300


7.4.2.5

Installing the 4x 2.5-inch HDD SAS backplane

Figure 64: Installing the 2.5-inch HDD SAS backplane

Ê

Insert the 4x 2.5-inch HDD SAS backplane in that way that it is in the guiding recesses (see circles).

Ê

Fasten the 4x2.5-inch HDD SAS backplane with the screw (see arrow).

RX300 S7



7.4.2.6

Installing the HDD cage

Figure 65: Installing the 2.5-inch HDD cage

Ê

Secure the 2.5-inch HDD SAS backplane on the drive cage with the screws.

Figure 66: Reconnecting cables to the 4x 2.5-inch HDD SAS backplane

Ê

Reconnect all cables to the 2.5-inch HDD SAS backplane:

– SAS cable to backplane connectors X1

– Power cable to SAS backplane connector X6

– If applicable power cable to SAS backplane connector X9


RX300


I

For a complete cabling overview, please refer to section "Cables overview" on page 513

.

7.4.2.7



Ê


Ê


Ê

"Installing the front cover" on page 493

Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


7.4.3

Replacing the 12x 2.5-inch HDD SAS backplane



7.4.3.1

Required tools

●

●



Replacing the SAS backplane:


RX300 S7



7.4.3.2


I

The 2.5-inch HDD SAS backplane is mounted on the drive cages. It is not necessary to remove the drive cage before replacing the SAS / SATA backplane


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


"Removing 2.5-inch HDD / SSD modules" on page 148 .

V

CAUTION!


Ê




Ê


Ê


Ê



RX300


7.4.3.3

Removing the 12x2.5-inch HDD SAS backplane

Figure 67: Disconnecting cables from the 12x 2.5-inch HDD SAS backplane

Ê

Disconnect all cables from the 12x 2.5-inch HDD SAS backplane:

– SAS cables

– Power cables

Figure 68: Removing the 2.5-inch HDD SAS backplane (A)

RX300 S7



Ê

Remove the three screws of the 12x 2.5-inch HDD SAS backplane (see circles).

Ê

Tilt out the 12x 2.5-inch HDD SAS backplane as shown.

Ê

At a slight angle, unhinge the 12x 2.5-inch HDD SAS backplane from the guides on the drive cage and remove it.

7.4.3.4

Installing the 12x 2.5-inch HDD SAS backplane

Figure 69: Installing the 12x 2.5-inch HDD SAS backplane (A)

Ê

At a slight angle, fit the 12x 2.5-inch HDD SAS backplane into the guides on the bottom of the chassis.

Ê

Fold in the 12x 2.5-inch HDD SAS backplane.

Ê

Secure the 12x 2.5-inch HDD SAS backplane with the three screws .


RX300


Figure 70: connecting cables tothe 12x 2.5-inch HDD SAS backplane

Ê

Reconnect all cables to the 12x 2.5-inch HDD SAS backplane:

– SAS cable (C9) connected to SAS controller connector MLC1 to primary backplane connectors X1

– SAS cable (C9) connected to SAS controller connector MLC2 to secondary backplane connectors X2

– Power cable (C5) connected to SAS backplane connector X17

– Power cable (C4) connected to SAS backplane connector X15

I


.

RX300 S7



7.4.3.5



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê



RX300

8 System fan

Basic information

I

The fan configuration is redundant. One fan may be faulty. Replace the fan as soon a possible. During the server is switched on, only one fan may be remove.

I

Additional fans in PSU modules are integral parts of the power supply units and cannot be replaced separately.

V

CAUTION!

Since the system fan is not redundant is has to be replaced immediately in case of defects or prefailure events.

Safety notes

V

CAUTION!

●

Do not damage or modify internal cables or devices. Doing so may cause a device failure, fire, or electric shock.

●

●

●

●

●

Devices and components inside the server remain hot after shutdown. After shutting down the server, wait for hot components to cool down before installing or removing internal options.

Circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed and can be damaged by static electricity. Always discharge static build-up

(e.g. by touching a grounded object) before handling electrostaticsensitive devices (ESDs).

Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold circuit boards by their metallic areas or edges.

If devices are installed or disassembled using methods other than those outlined in this chapter, the warranty will be invalidated.

For further information, please refer to chapter "Important information" on page 41

RX300 S7


System fan

8.1

Replacing the fan module



8.1.1

Required tools

●

●


Replacing the fan module: tool-less

8.1.2



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê


.

8.1.3

Removing a fan module

I

Please notice the advices for redundancy!


RX300

System fan

Figure 71: Removing a fan module

Ê

Take the fan module by the green markt touche points.

Ê

Lift the fan module out of the fan box.

8.1.4

Installing a fan module

rx300s7-fan-out-1-6134.png

Figure 72: Installing a fan module

RX300 S7


System fan

Ê

Insert the fan module as shown.

Ê

Press down on the fan module until it locks.

8.1.5



Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê


8.2

Removing the fan box



8.2.1

Required tools

●

●


Replacing the fan module: tool-less

8.2.2



Ê


Ê



RX300

System fan

Ê


Ê


Ê



"Removing the server from the rack" on page 67

.

Ê


Ê


8.2.3

Removing fan module 2 and 4

FAN 2 FAN 4

Figure 73: Removing a fan module

Ê

Take the fan modules by the green markt touch points and lift the fan modules out of the fan box.

RX300 S7


System fan

8.2.4

Removing the fan box

Figure 74: Removing the fan box

Ê

Remove the two screws.

Figure 75: Removing the fan box

Ê

Take the fan box by the green marked touch points and lift the fan box out of the chassis.


RX300

8.2.5

Installing the fan box

System fan


Ê

Take the fan box by the green touch points and insert the fan box.


Ê

Fasten the fan box with the 2 screws.

RX300 S7


System fan

Ê

Install the two fan modules see section "Installing a fan module" on page 173

.

8.2.6



Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê



RX300

9 Expansion cards and backup units

Safety notes

V

CAUTION!

●

Do not damage or modify internal cables or devices. Doing so may cause a device failure, fire, or electric shock.

●

●

●





●

●

If devices are installed or disassembled using methods other than those outlined in this chapter, the warranty will be invalidated.

For further information, please refer to chapter "Important information" on page 41 .

9.1


The system board is equipped with seven expansion slots:

RX300 S7


Expansion cards and backup units

Slot 6

Slot 5

Slot 4

Slot 3

Slot 2

Slot 1

Figure 78: PCI slot overview

1

4

5

6

2

3

7

PCI slot Type

PCIe Gen 3

PCIe Gen 3

PCIe Gen 3

PCIe Gen 3

PCIe Gen 2

PCIe Gen 3

PCIe Gen 3

Mechanical connector

x8 x8 x8 x16 x16 x16 x8

Slot 7

Electrical interface

x4 x4 x4 x8 x16 x8

Function

preferred slot for Modular

LAN controller (with NCSI connector) CPU1

CPU1

CPU1

CPU1

CPU2

CPU2 slot for SAS RAID controller


RX300


Expansion card overview

Vendor/Type Bus Max# Slot 1 Slot2 Slot3 Slot4 Slot5 Slot6 Slot7

2 1 Nvidia NVS 300 x1

SAS/RAID

Cougar II F3554

(LSISA2108) D2616

Cougar III F???

(LSISA2208) D2???

x1 x8 x8

LYNX II SAS2008

D2607

LYNX I LSI1084

D2507-D

X8 x4

LSI WASAT 9280-8e x8

Modular LAN

D2755 Dual Port

10GE Niantic

D2745 Quad Port

Barton Hills

D2735 Dual Port

Kawela x8 x4 x4

Infiniband

IB HCA 56 Gbit 1 and

2 port x8

IB HCA 40 Gbit 1 port x8

IB HCA 40 Gbit 2 port x8

SCSI (Backup) FJ only

Adaptec 29320 LP x1

SAS(Backup)

LSI SAS 3442 (3G)

LSI SAS 9200-8e

FC

LP 1250 8 Gbit

Lpe 12002 8 Gbit

QLE2560 8 Gbit x4 x8 x8 x8 x8

1

2

3

3

4

4

4

2

2

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

6

6

6

6

6

6

2

5

5

5

2

5

5

5

2

2

1

4

4

4

3

1

1

1

3

3

3

3

3

1

4

4

4

1

1

2

2

2

5

3

3

3

5

5

1

1

1

4

2

2

2

4

4

1

1

1

1

RX300 S7



Vendor/Type

QLE2562 8 Gbit

Fibre Over Ethernet

CAN F3961

Ethernet

D2755 Dual Port

10GE

D2745 Quad Port

D2735 Dual Port

Kawela x8 x4 x4

PRO/1000 CT Shelter x1

PRO/1000 PF Dual x4

Bus Max# Slot 1 Slot2 Slot3 Slot4 Slot5 Slot6 Slot7

x8 x8

4

4

6

6

5

5

1

1

4

4

3

3

2

2

2

3

3

4

4

1

1

1

1

1

6

6

6

6

6

5

5

5

5

5

4

4

4

4

4

3

3

3

3

3

2

2

2

2

2

I

For the latest information on supported expansion cards, refer your server’s hardware configurator available online at the following address: for the EMEA market:

http://ts.fujitsu.com/products/standard_servers/rack/primergy_rx300s7.html

for the Japanese market:



RX300


9.2

Expansion cards

9.2.1

Installing expansion cards


Average hardware task duration: 5 minutes

Average software task duration: 5 minutes

●

●

9.2.1.1

Required tools

●


Installing expansion cards:


Mounting slot brackets:


RX300 S7



9.2.1.2



Ê


Ê


Ê

"Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 84

Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê


9.2.1.3

Removing PCI slot bracket

Figure 79: Removing the PCI slot bracket (B)

Ê

Remove the screw.

Ê

Remove the slot bracket.


RX300


V

CAUTION!

Keep the slot bracket for further use.

Always replace slot brackets into unused PCI slot openings to comply with applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements.

9.2.1.4

Installing an expansion card

Ê

Remove the expansion card from its protective packaging.

I

For further instructions regarding controller settings, please refer to the accompanying documentation.

Ê

If applicable, attach the required slot bracket to the expansion card as

described in section "Mounting expansion card slot brackets" on page 247 .

Figure 80: Installing the expansion card (A)

Ê

Carefully insert the expansion card into the desired PCI slot and press down firmly until it is fully seated in the slot.

RX300 S7



Figure 81: Installing the expansion card (B)

Ê

Fasten the expansion card with the screw.

Ê

If applicable, install SFP+ transceiver modules into the new expansion card,

as described in section "Installing SFP+ transceiver modules" on page 254

.

9.2.1.5

Connecting cables to the expansion card

Ê

If applicable, connect internal cables to the expansion card.

I



9.2.1.6

Connecting a battery backup unit to the expansion card

Ê

If applicable, connect a BBU to the expansion card as described in section

"Installing a BBU" on page 219

.

9.2.1.7



Ê



RX300


Ê


Ê




.

Ê

Reconnect all external cables to the replaced expansion card.

Ê


Ê

After installing or replacing a Modular RAID controller, update the firmware

as described in section "Updating RAID controller firmware" on page 95

.

Ê

In order to configure an expansion card that has been installed or replaced, the card’s Option ROM has to be enabled in the system board BIOS. If

applicable, proceed as described in section "Enabling Option ROM scan" on page 96 .

Ê

"Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 100

Ê


Ê

If applicable, restore LAN teaming configurations as described in section

"After replacing / upgrading LAN controllers" on page 109 .

Ê


RX300 S7



9.2.2

Removing expansion cards



●

●

9.2.2.1

Required tools


Removing expansion cards:


9.2.2.2



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê

Remove all external cables from the expansion card to be removed.

Ê




Ê


Ê



RX300

9.2.2.3

Removing an expansion card


Figure 82: Removing an expansion card (A)

Ê

If applicable, remove SFP+ transceiver modules from the expansion card,

as described in section "Removing an SFP+ transceiver module" on page 260 .

Ê

Remove the screw.

Ê

Carefully remove the expansion card from its slot.

RX300 S7



9.2.2.4

Installing a PCI slot bracket

V

CAUTION!


Figure 83: Installing a PCI slot bracket (A)

Ê

Insert a PCI slot bracket into the unused PCI slot opening.

Ê

Fasten PCI slot bracket braket with the screw.

9.2.2.5



Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê



RX300


Ê


Ê


9.2.3

Replacing expansion cards




Note on network settings recovery

I

When replacing network controllers or the system board, network configuration settings in the operating system will be lost and replaced by default values. This applies to all static IP address and LAN teaming configurations.

Ensure to note down your current network settings before replacing a controller or the system board.

●

●

9.2.3.1

Required tools

●


Replacing expansion cards:




9.2.3.2



Ê

If applicable, ensure to note down your current network settings in the operating system. For further information, please refer to section

"Note on network settings recovery" on page 191

.

RX300 S7



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê

Remove all external cables from the expansion card to be replaced.

Ê




Ê


Ê


Ê

Locate the defective expansion card using the onboard Local Diagnostic

LEDs as described in section

"Onboard indicators and controls" on page 535

.

9.2.3.3

Removing an expansion card

Ê

If applicable, remove SFP+ transceiver modules from the expansion card to be removed, as described in section

"Removing an SFP+ transceiver module" on page 260 .

Ê

"Removing expansion cards" on page 188

Ê

If the slot bracket on the defective expansion card is to be reused, remove it

from the board as described in section "Mounting expansion card slot brackets" on page 247 .

9.2.3.4

Installing an expansion card

Ê

If applicable, install a slot bracket on the new expansion card as described

in section "Mounting expansion card slot brackets" on page 247 .

Ê

Install the new expansion card as described in section "Installing expansion cards" on page 183 .


RX300


Ê

If applicable, reinstall SFP+ transceiver modules on the new expansion card, as described in section

"Installing SFP+ transceiver modules" on page 254 .

9.2.3.5


Ê

If applicable, connect internal cables to the expansion card.

I


.

9.2.3.6

Connecting a battery backup unit to the expansion card

Ê

If applicable, connect a BBU to the expansion card as described in section

"Installing a BBU" on page 219 .

9.2.3.7



Ê


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê


Ê

"Enabling replaced components in the system BIOS" on page 101

Ê

Inform the customer about changed WWN and MAC addresses. For further information, refer to section

"Looking up changed MAC / WWN addresses" on page 107 .

Ê

After replacing a network controller in a server running Linux OS, update its

MAC address in the related NIC definition file as described in section


Ê

"Updating RAID controller firmware" on page 95

Ê


RX300 S7



Ê


Ê

If applicable, reconfigure your network settings in the operation system according to the original configuration of the replaced controller (expansion card or onboard).

I

Configuration of network settings should be performed by the customer.

For further information, please refer to section "Note on network settings recovery" on page 191

.

Ê

"After replacing / upgrading LAN controllers" on page 109

Ê



RX300


9.3

SAS RAID controller in PCI slot 7

9.3.1

Installing the SAS RAID controller




●

●

9.3.1.1

Required tools

●


Installing the SAS RAID controller:




9.3.1.2



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê


RX300 S7



9.3.1.3

Preparing the SAS RAID controller

Figure 84: Installing the RAID card holder

Ê

Place the controller on the mounting tabs on the slot bracket (1).

Ê

Secure the slot bracket to the controller with two M3 x 4.5 mm screws (2).

9.3.1.4

Installing the SAS RAID controller

Ê

Remove the SAS RAID controller from its protective packaging.

I


Ê

If applicable, attach the required slot bracket to the expansion card as described in section

"Preparing the SAS RAID controller" on page 196

.


RX300


Figure 85: Installing the SAS RAID controller

Ê

Carefully insert the RAID controller into PCI slot 7 and press down firmly until it is fully seated in the slot (1).

I

For slot preferences, please refer to section

"Basic information" on page 179

.

Ê

Secure the RAID controller with the screw on the RAID card holder (2).

9.3.1.5


Ê

Connect SAS cables to the SAS RAID controller.

I


.

9.3.1.6

Connecting a backup unit to the expansion card

Ê

If applicable, connect a BBU or FBU to the expansion card as described in sections

"Installing a BBU" on page 219 or

"Installing a FBU" on page 233 .

RX300 S7



9.3.1.7



Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê


Ê


applicable, proceed as described in section "Enabling Option ROM scan" on page 96

.

Ê




.

Ê



.

Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


.


RX300


9.3.2

Removing the SAS RAID controller



●

●

9.3.2.1

Required tools




9.3.2.2



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê


RX300 S7



9.3.2.3

Removing the SAS RAID controller

Figure 86: Removing the SAS RAID controller

Ê

Loosen the screw on the RAID card holder (2).

Ê

Carefully pull up on the SAS RAID controller in a vertical motion and remove it from its slot (1).

9.3.2.4



Ê


Ê


Ê



RX300




.

Ê


Ê


Ê



Ê



"Updating the NIC configuration file in a Linux environment" on page 104 .

Ê



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


9.3.3

Replacing the SAS RAID controller




●

●

9.3.3.1

Required tools


Replacing the SAS RAID controller:

RX300 S7



●




9.3.3.2



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê


9.3.3.3

Removing the defective SAS RAID controller

Ê

"Removing the SAS RAID controller" on page 199

Ê

If the RAID card holder on the defective controller is to be reused, remove it

from the board as described in section "Preparing the SAS RAID controller" on page 196

.

9.3.3.4

Installing the new SAS RAID controller

Ê

If applicable, install the RAID card holder on the new SAS RAID controller as described in section

"Preparing the SAS RAID controller" on page 196

.

Ê

"Installing the SAS RAID controller" on page 195

9.3.3.5


Ê

Connect SAS cables to the SAS RAID controller.

I




RX300


9.3.3.6

Connecting a backup unit to the expansion card

Ê

If applicable, connect a BBU to the expansion card as described in sections

"Installing a BBU" on page 219

or "Installing a FBU" on page 233 .

9.3.3.7



Ê


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê


Ê



Ê



"Updating the NIC configuration file in a Linux environment" on page 104 .

Ê



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


RX300 S7



9.4

Modular LAN controller in PCI slot 1

I

PCI slot 1 is the preferred slot for Modular LAN controllers with NCSI connector.

Figure 87: Modular LAN controller D2766

9.4.1

Installing the Modular LAN controller




●

●

9.4.1.1

Required tools

●


Installing the modular LAN controller:




RX300



9.4.1.2


Before installing a Modular LAN controller, perform the following steps:

Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê


9.4.1.3

Preparing the Modular LAN controller

Mounting the slot bracket

Figure 88: Mounting the PCI slot bracket

Ê

Place the controller on the mounting tabs on the slot bracket.

RX300 S7



Ê

Carefully shift the slot bracket towards the controller until the plug shells engage with the cut-outs in the slot bracket connector panel.

Ê

Secure the slot bracket to the controller with two M3 x 4.5 mm screws.

Connecting the NCSI sideband cable to the Modular LAN controller

I

Connecting the NCSI sideband cable is only necessary in order to use the Modular LAN controller as a shared LAN interface, that allows both, management and dedicated LAN connections.

If the Modular LAN controller is to be used for dedicated network connections only, please skip this section.

Figure 89: NCSI sideband cable


RX300


Figure 90: Connecting the NCSI sideband cable

Ê

Connect the NCSI sideband cable to the Modular LAN controller:

Connector

20-pin (black)

Cable

NCSI sideband cable T26139-Y4015-V101

I


.

9.4.1.4

Removing PCI slot bracket

Ê

"Removing PCI slot bracket" on page 184

RX300 S7



9.4.1.5


Ê

Remove the Modular LAN controller from its protective packaging.

I


Ê

"Preparing the Modular LAN controller" on page 205 .

Figure 91: Installing the Modular LAN controller

Ê

Carefully insert the Modular LAN controller into PCI slot 1 and press down firmly until it is fully seated in the slot.


RX300


Figure 92: Fasten the Modular LAN controller

Ê

Fasten the Modular LAN controller with a screw.

Ê

If applicable, install SFP+ transceiver modules into the Modular LAN

controller, as described in section "Installing SFP+ transceiver modules" on page 254 .

Connecting the NCSI sideband cable to the system board

I

Connecting the NSCI sideband cable is only necessary in order to use the Modular LAN controller as a shared LAN interface, that allows both, management and dedicated LAN connections.

If the Modular LAN controller is to be used for dedicated network connections only, please skip this section.

RX300 S7



Figure 93: Connecting cable

Ê

Connect the loose end of the NCSI sideband cable to the system board:

Connector

NC-SI

Cable

NCSI sideband cable T26139-Y4015-V101


RX300


9.4.1.6


Perform the following procedures to complete the task:

Ê


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê


.

Ê



Ê

"Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 100 .

Ê


.

Ê



9.4.1.7

Concluding software tasks

If the Modular LAN controller is to be used as a shared LAN interface, please proceed as follows:

Ê

Ensure that the NCSI cable has been connected to the Modular LAN controller and the system board as described in sections

"Connecting the

NCSI sideband cable to the Modular LAN controller" on page 206

and

"Connecting the NCSI sideband cable to the system board" on page 209

.

Ê

Enter the BIOS.

Ê


Ê

Under iRMC LAN Parameters Configuration set the Management LAN Port setting to Shared 2.

Ê


RX300 S7



I


The document is available online at


(


for the Japanese market) or from the ServerView Suite DVD 2 supplied with your

PRIMERGY server.


RX300


9.4.2

Removing the Modular LAN controller



●

●

9.4.2.1

Required tools




9.4.2.2



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê


RX300 S7 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 213


9.4.2.3


Figure 94: Detaching the Modular LAN controller

Ê

If applicable, remove SFP+ transceiver modules from the Modular LAN

controller, as described in section "Removing an SFP+ transceiver module" on page 260

.

Ê

Remove the screw (1).

Ê

Disconnect the NCSI sideband cable from the system board (2).

Ê

Carefully pull up on the Modular LAN controller in a vertical motion and remove it from its slot (3).


RX300


9.4.2.4

Installing a PCI slot bracket

V

CAUTION!


Figure 95: Installing a PCI slot bracket

Ê

Insert a PCI slot bracket into the unused PCI slot opening.

Ê

Fasten the PCI slot bracket with the screw.

RX300 S7



9.4.2.5



Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê

"Connecting the server to the mains" on page 78 .

Ê


applicable, proceed as described in section "Enabling Option ROM scan" on page 96

.

Ê


.

Ê


.

Ê



.


RX300


9.4.3

Replacing the Modular LAN controller





I



●

●

9.4.3.1

Required tools

●


Replacing the modular LAN controller:




9.4.3.2



Ê

Ensure to note down your current network settings in the operating system.

For further information, please refer to section "Note on network settings recovery" on page 217

.

Ê


Ê


Ê


RX300 S7



Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê


9.4.3.3


Ê

If applicable, remove SFP+ transceiver modules from the Modular LAN

controller to be removed, as described in section "Removing an SFP+ transceiver module" on page 260

.

Ê

Remove the defective Modular LAN controller as described in section

"Removing the Modular LAN controller" on page 213

.

Ê

If the slot bracket on the defective Modular LAN controller is to be reused, remove it from the board as described in section

"Preparing the Modular

LAN controller" on page 205

.

9.4.3.4


Ê

If applicable, install a slot bracket on the new Modular LAN controller as described in section

"Preparing the Modular LAN controller" on page 205 .

Ê

Install the new Modular LAN controller as described in section "Installing the

Modular LAN controller" on page 204 .

Ê

If applicable, reinstall SFP+ transceiver modules on the new Modular LAN controller, as described in section

"Installing SFP+ transceiver modules" on page 254

.

9.4.3.5



Ê


Ê


Ê



RX300




.

Ê


Ê


.

Ê



Ê


.

Ê

"Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 100 .

Ê

Reconfigure your network settings in the operation system according to the original configuration of the replaced controller (expansion card or onboard).

I


For further information, please refer to section

"Note on network settings recovery" on page 217 .

Ê



9.5

Battery Backup Units (BBU)

The Battery Backup Unit (BBU) backs up the memory contents of the connected

SAS RAID controller in the event of a power failure. The PRIMERGY RX300 S7 server can accommodate up to two BBUs.

9.5.1

Installing a BBU



RX300 S7



V

CAUTION!


"Important information" on page 41 .

●

●

9.5.1.1

Required tools


Installing a BBU: tool-less

9.5.1.2



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê

Open the server cover as described in section


.


RX300

9.5.1.3

Preparing the BBU


Figure 96: Connecting the BBU cable (example B)

Ê

Connect the BBU cable to the BBU.

V

CAUTION!

Make sure that the connector side with the three dots is on the top (see close-up). Otherwise you risk short-circuits.

I

There are different BBUs available. Please notice the position of the three bolts (see circles

figure 97

) to recognise the right position for installing the BBU in the BBU holder.

RX300 S7



Figure 97: Installing the BBU in the BBU holder (example B)

Ê

At a slight angle, fit the BBU under the right retaining bracket on the BBU holder (1).

Ê

Fold down the BBU until it locks in place (2).

9.5.1.4

Installing the BBU holder onto the air duct

I

There are different BBUs available. The position of the BBU cable on the

BBU can differ from the following example.


RX300


Figure 98: Installing the BBU holder (A)

I

Note the positions of the fixation bolts on the air duct and keyhole slots on the BBU holder.

Figure 99: Installing the BBU holder (B)

RX300 S7



Ê

Insert the BBU holder into the air duct so that the three fixation bolts on the air duct rest in the wide ends of the keyhole slots on the holder (see closeup) (1).

Ê

Slide the BBU holder to the right as far as it will go (2).

The fixation bolts on the air duct will lock in the narrow ends of the keyhole slots on the BBU holder.

Ê

Ensure that the locking handle on the BBU holder properly snaps in place

(3).

Figure 100: Connecting the BBU to the controller

Ê

Insert the air duct.

Ê

Tilt up the air duct a little.

Ê

Thread the BBU cable though the gap in the air duct (1)

Ê

Connect the BBU cable to the RAID controller (2).

I

The connector side with the three dots points towards you.

9.5.1.5




RX300


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê

If applicable, update the firmware of the RAID controller that has been connected to the BBU as described in section


.

Ê


Ê


Note on BBU charging and calibration

The BBU may be deeply discharged due to extended storage time and wrongly show as bad or defective in the ServerView RAID Manager.

In this case, the BBU will automatically enter a trickle charge cycle for recovery.

This initial charge may take up to 8 hours before the BBU will initiate a recalibration cycle.

Ê

Enter the ServerView RAID Manager and check the current BBU status.

I





Ê

If the BBU is shown as bad or defective, do not power off the server for at least 8 hours to allow the charge and calibration cycles to finish.

Ê

If the BBU status does not change after 8 hours, please try to initiate the recalibration process manually using the ServerView RAID Manager.

I

If this procedure still does not fix the BBU status, please contact your local Fujitsu customer service partner.

RX300 S7



9.5.2

Removing a BBU



V

CAUTION!

Do not throw battery backup units into the trash can. Batteries must be disposed of in accordance with local regulations concerning special waste.

For further safety information, please refer to section

"Environmental protection" on page 51 .

9.5.2.1

Required tools

●

●


Removing a BBU: tool-less

9.5.2.2



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê



RX300


9.5.2.3

Removing the BBU holder from the air duct

Figure 101: Disconnecting the BBU cable

Ê


Ê

Carefully disconnect the BBU cable from the RAID controller (see arrow).

Ê

Pull the BBU cabel through the gap in the air duct.

RX300 S7



Figure 102: Removing the BBU holder from the air duct (A)

Ê

Lift up the green locking handle on the BBU holder (1) while sliding the BBU holder to the left as far as it will go (2).

I

After that, the fixation bolts on the air duct will rest in the wide ends of the keyhole slots on the holder.

Ê

Lift the BBU holder from the air duct (3).

9.5.2.4



Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê



RX300


9.5.3

Replacing a BBU



V

CAUTION!



"Environmental protection" on page 51

.

●

●

9.5.3.1

Required tools


Replacing a BBU: tool-less

9.5.3.2



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


RX300 S7



9.5.3.3

Removing a BBU from the air duct

Ê

Remove the BBU module from the air duct as described in section

"Removing a BBU" on page 226

.

9.5.3.4

Removing the BBU from the BBU holder

Figure 103: Removing the BBU from the BBU holder

Ê

Press out on the right retaining bracket on the BBU holder (1) to disengage the locking mechanism while pulling up on the BBU (2).


RX300


Figure 104: Disconnecting the BBU cable from the BBU

Ê

Carefully disconnect the BBU cable from the BBU.

9.5.3.5

Installing a new BBU

Ê

Install the new BBU into the BBU holder as described in section "Preparing the BBU" on page 221 .

Ê

"Installing the BBU holder onto the air duct" on page 222

Ê

Connect the BBU to the controller.

9.5.3.6



Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê

If applicable, update the firmware of the RAID controller that has been connected to the BBU as described in section


.

Ê


RX300 S7



Ê


Note on BBU charging and calibration

The BBU may be deeply discharged due to extended storage time and wrongly show as bad or defective in the ServerView RAID Manager.

In this case, the BBU will automatically enter a trickle charge cycle for recovery.

This initial charge may take up to 8 hours before the BBU will initiate a recalibration cycle.

Ê

Enter the ServerView RAID Manager and check the current BBU status.

I





Ê

If the BBU is shown as bad or defective, do not power off the server for at least 8 hours to allow the charge and calibration cycles to finish.

Ê

If the BBU status does not change after 8 hours, please try to initiate the recalibration process manually using the ServerView RAID Manager.

I

If this procedure still does not fix the BBU status, please contact your local Fujitsu customer service partner.


RX300


9.6

Flash Backup Units (FBU)

The Flash Backup Unit (FBU) backs up the memory contents of the connected

SAS RAID controller in the event of a power failure. The PRIMERGY RX300 S7 server can accommodate up to two FBUs.

9.6.1

Installing a FBU



V

CAUTION!


"Important information" on page 41

.

●

●

9.6.1.1

Required tools


Installing a FBU: tool-less

9.6.1.2



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




.

Ê

Open the server cover as described in section "Removing the server cover" on page 69 .

RX300 S7



9.6.1.3

Preparing the SAS RAID controller

Figure 105: SAS RAID controller and TFM module kit

1 SAS RAID controller D3116

2-3 TFM module kit including three pre-assembled spacer bolts and six screws (A3C40137316 / LSZ:L3-25419-01)

Figure 106: Mounting the TFM module kit (A)

Ê

Fit the spacer bolts on the TFM module on SAS RAID controller D3116.


RX300


Figure 107: Mouting the TFM module kit (B)

Ê

Secure the TFM module on the controller with the three screws from the

TFM module kit.

RX300 S7



9.6.1.4

Preparing the FBU

Figure 108: Installing the FBU in the FBU holder (A)

Ê

At a slight angle, fit the FBU (A3C40137317) under both retaining brackets of the FBU holder (C26361-K644-C970) as shown.

Ê

Push in the FBU until it locks in place.


RX300


Figure 109: Installing the FBU in the FBU holder (B)

Ê

Ensure that the FBU is properly seated in the FBU holder as shown.

Figure 110: Connecting the FBU adapter cable to the FBU

RX300 S7



Ê

Connect the cable end on the FBU module to the FBU adapter cable

(T26139-Y4032-V1) as shown.

9.6.1.5

Installing the FBU holder onto the air duct

I

The Installation of a FBU onto the air duct is similar to the installation of

an BBU see section "Installing the BBU holder onto the air duct" on page 222

Figure 111: Connecting the FBU to the controller

Ê

Insert the air duct.

Ê

Thread the FBU cable through the gap in the air duct (1)

Ê



RX300


Figure 112: Connecting the FBU to the controller

Ê

Connect the FBU cable to the RAID controller (2).

9.6.1.6



Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê

If applicable, update the firmware of the RAID controller that has been connected to the FBU as described in section


.

Ê


Ê


RX300 S7



9.6.2

Removing a FBU



V

CAUTION!

Do not throw backup units into the trash can. Batteries must be disposed of in accordance with local regulations concerning special waste.


"Environmental protection" on page 51 .

●

●

9.6.2.1

Required tools


Removing a FBU: tool-less

9.6.2.2



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê



RX300


9.6.2.3

Removing the FBU holder from the air duct

Figure 113: Disconnecting the FBU cable

Ê

Carefully disconnect the FBU cable from the RAID controller (see arrow).

Ê

Pull the FBU cabel through the gap in the air duct.

RX300 S7



Figure 114: Removing the FBU holder from the air duct (A)

Ê

Lift up the green locking handle on the FBU holder (1) while sliding the FBU holder to the left as far as it will go (2).

I

After that, the fixation bolts on the air duct will rest in the wide ends of the keyhole slots on the holder.

Ê

Lift the FBU holder from the air duct (3).

9.6.2.4



Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê



RX300


9.6.3

Replacing a FBU



V

CAUTION!



"Environmental protection" on page 51

.

●

●

9.6.3.1

Required tools


Replacing a FBU: tool-less

9.6.3.2



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


9.6.3.3

Removing a FBU from the air duct

Ê

"Removing a FBU" on page 240

RX300 S7



9.6.3.4

Removing the FBU from the FBU holder

Figure 115: Removing the FBU from the FBU holder

Ê

At a slight angle, slide the FBU from under the retaining brackets of the FBU holder and remove it.


RX300


Figure 116: Disconnecting the FBU adapter cable from the FBU

Ê

Press down on the locking latch on the FPU cable (see close-up) and disconnect the FBU adapter cable..

9.6.3.5

Installing a new BBU

Ê

Install the new BBU into the BBU holder as described in section "Preparing the FBU" on page 236 .

Ê

"Installing the FBU holder onto the air duct" on page 238

Ê

Connect the FBU to the controller.

9.6.3.6



Ê


Ê




.

Ê


RX300 S7



Ê


Ê

If applicable, update the firmware of the RAID controller that has been

connected to the BBU as described in section "Updating RAID controller firmware" on page 95 .

Ê



RX300


9.7

Additional tasks

This section provides additional expansion card related information on how to install slot brackets and SFP+ transceiver modules.

I


9.7.1

Mounting expansion card slot brackets



This section provides general instructions on mounting slot brackets as well as specific instructions for the following network adapters:

●

"Network adapter D2735" on page 248

●

●



●

●

9.7.1.1

Required tools




9.7.1.2

General instructions

Ê

Place the controller on the mounting tabs on the slot bracket.

Ê


Removal is carried out in reverse order.

I

For a more detailed description on how to install a slot bracket on a

controller, please refer to section "Network adapter D2735" on page 248 .

RX300 S7



9.7.1.3

Network adapter D2735

Figure 117: Network adapter D2735 - Mounting the slot bracket (A)

Ê


Ê

Carefully shift the slot bracket towards the controller (2) until the plug shells engage with the cut-outs in the slot bracket connector panel (see close-up).


RX300


Figure 118: Network adapter D2735 - Mounting the slot bracket (B)

Ê


Figure 119: Network adapter D2735 - Mounting the slot bracket (C)

I

Assembled network adapter D2735

RX300 S7



9.7.1.4



Ê

Hinge the slot bracket to the plug shell as shown (1).

Ê

Fold the slot bracket towards the controller until the threaded mounting tab is aligned with the screw hole on the controller (2).


RX300



Ê

Secure the slot bracket to the controller with one M3 x 4.5 mm screw.


I


RX300 S7



9.7.1.5



Ê


Ê

Carefully shift the slot bracket towards the controller until the plug shells engage with the cut-outs in the slot bracket connector panel (2).

Ê

Ensure that the ESD springs on the plug shells properly engage with the slot bracket as shown (see close-ups).


RX300



Ê



RX300 S7



I


9.7.2

Handling SFP+ transceiver modules

For Fiber Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) configurations, the Ethernet server adapter is equipped with one or two SFP+ (small form-factor pluggable) transceiver modules.

9.7.2.1

Installing SFP+ transceiver modules



Required tools

●


●

Installing SFP+ transceiver modules: tool-less


RX300


Preparing the SFP+ transceiver module

Figure 126: Removing the protective optical port plug

RX300 S7



Ê

Remove the SFP+ transceiver module from its protective packaging.

Ê

Remove the optical port plug from the new / additional SFP+ transceiver module.

V

CAUTION!

– Always keep the protective port plugs attached to the transceiver optical bores and fiber-optic cable connectors until you are ready to make a connection.

– Save the protective port plug for future use.

Figure 127: Unlatching the locking bail

Ê

Carefully unlatch and fold down the locking bail on the SFP+ transceiver module.


RX300

Inserting the SFP+ transceiver module


Figure 128: Inserting the SFP+ transceiver module

Ê

Insert and slide the SFP+ transceiver module into the socket connector as far as it will go.

I

If only one slot is equipped with a SFP+ transceiver module, use the primary right connector as shown.

RX300 S7



Figure 129: Latching the locking bail

Ê

Carefully fold up and latch the locking bail.

Figure 130: Attaching the protective optical port plug

Ê

If the SFP+ transceiver module is not immediately connected to an LC connector, attach the protective optical port plug to the transceiver optical bores.


RX300


Installing the secondary SFP+ transceiver module

Figure 131: Installing the secondary SFP+ transceiver module

Ê

If applicable, install the secondary SFP+ transceiver module accordingly.

RX300 S7



9.7.2.2

Removing an SFP+ transceiver module



For Fiber Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) configurations, the ethernet server adapter is equipped with one or two SFP+ (small form-factor pluggable) transceiver modules.

Required tools

●


●

Removing SFP+ transceiver modules: tool-less

Figure 132: Removing the protective optical port plug

Ê

If present, remove the protective optical port plug from the SFP+ transceiver module.

V

CAUTION!

Save the protective port plug for future use.


RX300


Figure 133: Unlatching the locking bail

Ê

Carefully unlatch and fold down the locking bail on the SFP+ transceiver module to eject the transceiver from the socket connector.

Figure 134: Removing the SFP+ transceiver

Ê

Pull the SFP+ transceiver module out of its socket connector.

Ê

Reattach the protective optical port plug to the transceiver optical bores.

I

Place the removed SFP+ transceiver module in an antistatic bag or other protective environment.

RX300 S7



9.7.2.3

Replacing SFP+ transceiver modules



For Fiber Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) configurations, the ethernet server adapter is equipped with one or two SFP+ (small form-factor pluggable) transceiver modules.

Required tools

●


●

Removing SFP+ transceiver modules: tool-less

Removing SFP+ transceiver modules

Ê

Remove the defective SFP+ transceiver module(s) as described in section

"Removing an SFP+ transceiver module" on page 260

.

Installing SFP+ transceiver modules

Ê

Unpack the new SFP+ transceiver module.

Ê

Verify that the new SFP+ transceiver module is the same type of transceiver you are replacing.

Ê

Install the new SFP+ transceiver module(s) as described in section

"Installing SFP+ transceiver modules" on page 254

.

Ê



.

I

By replacing SFP+ transceiver modules, WWN (World Wide Name) and MAC (Media Access Control) addresses will change.


RX300

10 Main memory

Safety notes

V

CAUTION!

●

Do not install unsupported third party memory modules. For further information on supported memory modules, refer to section

"Basic procedure" on page 264

.

●

●

●

●

Memory modules remain hot after shutdown. Wait for components to cool down before installing or removing memory modules to prevent burns.

Do not insert and remove memory modules repeatedly. Doing so may cause failures.

Pressing out the securing clips on the memory module connector will eject the installed memory module. To prevent damage and injuries eject memory modules carefully without applying excessive force.


RX300 S7


Main memory

10.1 Basic procedure

– The system board is equipped with 24 memory connectors

(12 connectors per CPU).

– In mono processor configurations only 12 memory connectors are usable.

– The system has to be equipped with at least one memory module per processor.

– Supported capacities: 2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB or 32 GB

– Maximum amount of RAM: 768 GB

– Supported memory modules:

Type

Ranking

1

SR DR QR

DDR3-1066

PC3-8500

DDR3-1333

PC3-10600

RDIMMs

(Registered DIMMs)

UDIMMs

(Unbuffered DIMMs) x x

DDR3-1600

PC3-12800

LRDIMMs

(Load-Reduced

DIMMs)

1

SR: Single-Rank, DR: Dual-Rank, QR: Quad-Rank x x x x

Error

Correction

ECC or non-

ECC

10.1.1 Memory sequence

10.1.1.1 Population rules

– Populate memory slot 1 / channel A (DIMM 1A) first.

– In case of dual processor configurations, populate memory slot

1 / channel E (DIMM 1E) second.

– Within all channels, memory slot 1 must be populated prior to slot 2.

Slot 2 must be populated prior to slot 3 (for all CPUs).

– If memory modules with different ranks are used, always populate the higher number rank DIMM first (starting from slot 1).

– If memory modules with different capacities are used:


RX300

Main memory

– Populate modules with higher capacities first.

– Within a channel, populate modules in descending order of capacity.

– If memory modules with different speeds are used, the lowest clock rate applies for all DIMMs.

Regardless of the mode, all DIMMs will run at the highest common frequency that is allowed by the SPD Data of the DIMMs and the maximum speed of the selected configuration.

– Mixing UDIMMs, RDIMMs or LRDIMMs is not allowed.

– Mixing ECC and non-ECC DIMMs is not allowed.

– Mixing of quad-rank DIMMs in one channel and three DIMMs in another channel (3DPC) on the same CPU is not allowed.

DIMM 1G

DIMM 2G

DIMM 3G

DIMM 1H

DIMM 2H

DIMM 3H

DIMM 1A

DIMM 2A

DIMM 3A

DIMM 1B

DIMM 2B

DIMM 3B

CPU 2

DIMM 3F

DIMM 2F

DIMM 3E

DIMM 2E

DIMM 1F

DIMM 1E

Figure 135: Memory overview

CPU 1

DIMM 3D

DIMM 2D

DIMM 1D

DIMM 3C

DIMM 2C

DIMM 1C

RX300 S7


Main memory

10.1.1.2 Independant Channel mode

C P U

Channel

DIMM

C P U 1 C P U 2

A B D C E F H G

1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B 1D 2D 3D 1C 2C 3C 1E 2E 3E 1F 2F 3F 1H 2H 3H 1G 2G 3G

# D I M M s

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

M o n o C P U c o n f i g u r a t i o n

1

1

1

1

1 5

1 5

1 5

1 5

3

3

3

3

3

3

7

7

4

4

4

4

4 8

2

2

2

2

2 6

2 6

2 6

1 5 9 3 7

1 5 9 3 7

4 8

4 8

2 6

2 6 10

1 5 9 3 7 11 4 8 2 6 10

1 5 9 3 7 11 4 8 12 2 6 10

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

# D I M M s

1

2

3

4

5

6

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

D u a l C P U c o n f i g u r a t i o n

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1 9

1 9

1 9

1 9

1 9

1 9

1 9

1 9

5 13

5 13

5 13

1 9 17 5 13

1 9 17 5 13

1 9 17 5 13

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5 13

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

7 15

7 15

7 15

7 15

7 15

3

3

3

3

3

3

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

3

3

3 11

3 11

3 11

3 11

3 11

3 11

2

2 10

2 10

2 10

2 10

2 10

2 10

2 10

6 14

6 14

6 14

3 11

3 11

2 10

2 10 18

6 14

6 14

3 11 19 2 10 18 6 14

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6 8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8 16

8 16

8 16

8 16

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4 12

4 12

4 12

4 12

4 12

4 12

4 12

4 12

1 9 17 5 13 7 15

1 9 17 5 13 21 7 15

1 9 17 5 13 21 7 15

3 11 19 2 10 18 6 14

3 11 19 2 10 18 6 14

8 16

8 16

3 11 19 2 10 18 6 14 22 8 16

4 12

4 12

4 12

20

20

20

1 9 17 5 13 21 7 15 23 3 11 19 2 10 18 6 14 22 8 16 4 12 20

1 9 17 5 13 21 7 15 23 3 11 19 2 10 18 6 14 22 8 16 24 4 12

20


RX300

Main memory

Notes on Independant Channel mode

– Configurations marked in grey are only possible with registered DIMMs

(RDIMMS and LR-DIMMs)

10.1.1.3 Mirrored Channel and Performance modes

C P U

Channel

DIMM

C P U 1 C P U 2

A B D C E F H G


# D I M M s

4

8

12


1

1 2

1

1 2

1

1 2

1

1 2

1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

# D I M M s

8

12

16

20

24

D u a l C P U c o n f i g u r a t i o n

1

1 3

1 3

1

1

1

3

3

1

1

1

3

3

1

1

1

3

3

2

2

2 4

2

2

2 4

2

2

2 4

2

2

2 4

1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4

1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6

Notes on Mirrored Channel and Performance modes

– Always populate memory modules in multiples of 4.

– Same numbers mean identical modules (capacity, rank).

RX300 S7


Main memory

10.1.1.4 Rank Sparing mode

Single-/Dual-Rank RDIMMs

C P U

Channel

DIMM

C P U 1 C P U 2

A B D C E F H G


# D I M M s

2

3

4

5

9

10

11

12

6

7

8


o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

# DIMMs

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

Dual CPU configuration (if all modules are of the same capacity)

o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o


RX300

Main memory

C P U

Ch.

DIMM

C P U 1 C P U C P U 2

E F H G

1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B 1D 2D 3D 1C 2C 3C

DIMM

1E 2E 3E 1F 2F 3F 1H 2H 3H 1G 2G 3G

#

2

3

Dual CPU configuration

(if modules are of different capacities)

o o o o o

#

2

3



o o o o o

4

5

6

7

8

o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

4

5

6

7

8

o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

9

o o o o o o

10

o o o o o o o o o o

9

o o o o o o o o o

10

o o o o o o o o o o o o o

11

o o o o o o o o o o o

11

o o o o o o o o o o o

12

o o o o o o o o o o o o

12


I

For detailed population rules, refer to section "Notes on Rank Sparing mode" on page 271 .

RX300 S7


Main memory

Quad-Rank RDIMMs

C P U

Channel

DIMM

C P U 1 C P U 2

A B D C E F H G


# D I M M s

1

2

3

4

10

11

12

7

8

5

6

9


o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

10

11

12

13

14

7

8

9

# DIMMs

1

4

5

2

3

6

Dual CPU configuration (if all modules are of the same capacity)

o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o


RX300

Main memory

C P U

Ch.

DIMM

C P U 1 C P U C P U 2

E F H G

1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B 1D 2D 3D 1C 2C 3C

DIMM

1E 2E 3E 1F 2F 3F 1H 2H 3H 1G 2G 3G

#

1

2

o o o



#

1

2

o o o



3

4

5

6

o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

3

4

5

6

o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

7

8

9

o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

10

o o o o o o o

11

o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

7

8

9

10

11

o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

12


12


Notes on Rank Sparing mode

– Same numbers mean identical modules (capacity, rank)

– In case of Single-/Dual-Rank memory configurations, at least two 1R or 2R modules must be populated per a channel.

– In case of Quad-Rank memory modules, please note the following: Due to performance reasons, always populate a new channel before installing the

3rd memory slot of a channel.

– Only one memoy module capacity per CPU is allowed.

If two different memory module capacities have been ordered for Rank

Sparing mode, populate them on different CPUs, so that each CPUs only comprises modules of one capacity

Example:

12 modules have been ordered, 8 x 4 GB and 4 x 8 GB.

In this case, proceed as follows:

Ê

Use the capacity group with more memory modules for CPU 1 and populate them according to the population sequence for mono CPU configurations.

Ê

Populate the other capacity group on CPU 2 according to the population rules for mono CPU configurations.

RX300 S7


Main memory

– In order to satisfy cooling requirements, populate memory channels on alternating sides of the processor:

Order

1

2

3

4

CPU 1

Channel A

Channel C

Channel B

Channel D

CPU 2

Channel E

Channel G

Channel F

Channel H

10.2 Installing memory modules



10.2.1 Required tools

●

●


Installing memory modules: tool-less

10.2.2 Preliminary steps


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê





RX300

Main memory

Ê


Ê


10.2.3 Installing a memory module

Ê

Identify the correct memory slot according to the mounting order described in section

"Memory sequence" on page 264 .

Figure 136: Installing memory modules (A)

Ê

Press out the securing clip at each end of the memory module connector.

RX300 S7


Main memory

Figure 137: Installing memory modules (B)

Ê

Align the notch on the bottom of the module with the crossbar in the connector (see close-up).

Figure 138: Installing memory modules (C)

Ê

Press down on the memory module until the securing clips snap into the cutouts at each end of the module.


RX300

Main memory

10.2.4 Concluding steps


Ê


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê

"Updating or recovering the system board BIOS and iRMC" on page 90

Ê


Ê

"Verifying the memory mode" on page 101

Ê


RX300 S7


Main memory

10.3 Removing memory modules




●

●


Removing memory modules: tool-less



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê


10.3.3 Removing a memory module

Ê

Identify the desired memory slot according to the mounting order described

in section "Memory sequence" on page 264

.


RX300

Main memory

V

CAUTION!

Ensure to maintain an operational configuration when removing memory modules. For additional information, please refer to section

"Basic procedure" on page 264

.

Figure 139: Removing memory modules (A)

Ê

Eject the desired memory module by pressing out the securing clips at each end of the memory module connector.

RX300 S7


Main memory

Figure 140: Removing memory modules (B)

Ê

Remove the ejected memory module.



Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê



RX300

Main memory

10.4 Replacing memory modules





●

●


Replacing memory modules: tool-less



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


.

Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê


Ê

Locate the defective memory module using the onboard Local Diagnostic

LEDs as described in section "Connectors and indicators on the system board" on page 531 .

RX300 S7


Main memory

10.4.3 Removing a memory module

Ê

Identify the defective memory slot using the server management software.

Ê

Remove the defective memory module as described in section "Removing memory modules" on page 276

.

10.4.4 Installing a memory module

Ê

Replace the defective memory module as described in section

"Installing memory modules" on page 272

.



Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê

"Enabling replaced components in the system BIOS" on page 101

Ê

"Verifying the memory mode" on page 101

Ê



RX300

11 Processors

Safety notes

V

CAUTION!

●

Do not install unsupported processors. For further information on

supported processors, refer to section "Basic information" on page 282

.

●


(e.g. by touching a grounded object) before handling electrostaticsensitive devices (ESDs)

●

●

●

●


When removing or installing processors, be careful not to touch or bend the spring contacts on the processor sockets.

Never touch the underside of the processors. Even minor soiling such as grease from the skin can impair the processor’s operation or destroy the processors.


RX300 S7


Processors

11.1


The system board D2939 offers two sockets for Intel Xeon processors.

11.1.1 Supported processors

– Intel Xeon E5-2600 processor series CPUs

– Socket type: LGA 2011 package

– Thermal Design Power (TDP) class: up to 130 W

11.1.2 Processor locations

CPU 2

Figure 141: CPU locations on system board D2939

CPU 1


RX300

Processors

11.2

Installing processors




V

CAUTION!

Processors are extremely sensitive to electrostatic discharge and must be handled with care. After a processor has been removed from its protective sleeve or from its socket, place it upside down on a nonconducting, antistatic surface. Never push a processor over a surface.


●

●

●


Removing and installing the processor heat sink:


Installing the processor: tool-less



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




.

RX300 S7


Processors

Ê


Ê

"Removing the air duct" on page 70 .c

11.2.3 Installing the processor

11.2.3.1 Opening the load plate of the processor socket

I

This description applies to the following procedures:

– Installing the second CPU in a mono-processor configuration

– Transfering a CPU after replacing the system board (see section

"Swapping processors" on page 483 )

Figure 142: Opening socket release lever 1

Ê

Unlatch the socket release lever marked Open 1st by pushing it down and away from the socket (1).

Ê

The socket release lever will slightly lift up (2).


RX300

Processors


Ê

Unlatch the socket release lever marked Close 1st by pushing it down and away from the socket (1).

Ê

Fully fold back the second socket release lever (2).

RX300 S7


Processors

Figure 144: Opening the load plate (A)

Ê

Push down on the first socket release lever (1) to lift the load plate away from the socket (2).


RX300

Processors

Figure 145: Opening the load plate (B)

Ê

Fully open the load plate.

V

CAUTION!

Be careful not to touch or bend the spring contacts on the processor socket!

Ê

Make sure that the load plate is in the fully open position.

Ê

Use a magnifying glass (recommended) to inspect the socket spring contacts for damages from different angles. Do not use the spare system board if any irregularities are visible. Possible damages:

– Contact spring is bent backwards upon itself

– Contact spring tip position is shifted or out of alignment

RX300 S7


Processors

V

CAUTION!

Never not try to fix bent contact springs. Doing so may result in loss of electrical performance and reliability.

11.2.3.2 Installing the processor

Figure 146: Installing the processor

Ê

Hold the processor with your thumb and index finger.

Ê

Make sure that the four notches on the processor align with the posts on the socket (see close-up).

Ê

Lower the processor straight down without tilting or sliding it in the socket.


RX300

Processors

V

CAUTION!

– Ensure that the processor is level in the socket.

– Be careful not to touch or bend the pins on the processor socket.

– Never touch the underside of the processor. Even minor soiling such as grease from the skin can impair the processor’s operation or destroy the processor.

– Ensure not to scrape or dent the processor edges.

11.2.3.3 Removing the protective socket cover

Figure 147: Closing the load plate

Ê

Carefully lower the load plate over the processor.

RX300 S7


Processors

Figure 148: Removing the protective socket cover

Ê

When closing the load plate, the protective socket cover will automatically detach.

Ê

Remove the socket cover and save it for future use.

V

CAUTION!

Always replace the socket cover if you remove the processor from the socket!


RX300

11.2.3.4 Closing th load

Processors

Figure 149: Closing socket release lever 2

Ê

Fully close and hold shut the load plate.

Ê

Close the socket release lever marked Close 1st (1) and latch it under the load plate retention tab to lock down the load plate (2).

RX300 S7


Processors


Ê

Close the socket release lever marked Open 1st (1) and latch it under the load plate retention tab (2).

Ê

If applicable, install the second processor accordingly.



Ê

"Installing processor heat sinks" on page 317

Ê


Ê


Ê



"Mounting the server cover" on page 73 .


RX300

Processors

Ê

Reconnect all external cables.

Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


RX300 S7


Processors

11.3

Removing processors




V

CAUTION!



●

●

●




Removing the processor: tool-less



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê





RX300

Processors

Ê


Ê


Ê

"Removing processor heat sinks" on page 321

11.3.3 Removing a processor

I

This description applies to the following procedures:

– Removing CPU 2 from a dual-processor configuration

– Removing CPUs from a defective system board (see section

"Swapping processors" on page 483

)

Ê

Remove the desired processor heat sink as described in section "Removing processor heat sinks" on page 321

.

11.3.3.1 Opening the cover plate


RX300 S7


Processors

Ê


Ê



Ê


Ê



RX300

Processors


Ê

Push down on the socket release lever marked Open 1st (1) to lift the load plate away from the socket (2).

RX300 S7


Processors


Ê



RX300

11.3.3.2 Removing the processor

Processors

Figure 155: Removing the processor

Ê

Carefully remove the defective processor from its socket in a vertical motion.

V

CAUTION!

Be careful not to touch or bend the spring contacts on the processor socket.

Ê

Thoroughly clean residual thermal paste from the processor surface using a lint-free cloth.

RX300 S7


Processors

Ê

Store the processor in a save place for later reuse.

V

CAUTION!


11.3.3.3 Closing the load plate


Ê

Carefully close the load plate over the empty processor socket.

V

CAUTION!



RX300

11.3.3.4 Installing the protective cover

Processors

Figure 157: Attaching the protective socket cover (A)

Ê

Carefully lower the protective socket cover onto the CPU socket in a vertical motion until it snaps in place.

V

CAUTION!

Always attach the socket cover if you remove the processor from the socket!

RX300 S7


Processors

Figure 158: Attaching the protective socket cover (B)

Ê

Ensure that the protective socket cover is properly installed on the socket as shown above.


RX300

11.3.3.5 Closing the load plate

Processors


Ê


Ê


RX300 S7


Processors


Ê




Ê


Ê


Ê

"Sliding the server into the rack" on page 77 .



Ê


Ê



RX300

Ê


Ê


11.4

Upgrading or replacing processors

Processors




V

CAUTION!



●

●

●




Upgrading or replacing the processor: tool-less



Ê


Ê


Ê


RX300 S7


Processors

Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê


Ê


11.4.3 Upgrading or replacing a processor

11.4.3.1 Removing the processor



RX300

Processors

Ê


Ê



Ê


Ê


RX300 S7


Processors


Ê

Push down on the socket release lever marked Open 1st (1) to lift the load plate away from the socket (2).


RX300

Processors


Ê


RX300 S7


Processors

Figure 165: Removing the processor

Ê

Carefully remove the processor from its socket in a vertical motion.

V

CAUTION!


Ê

Thoroughly clean residual thermal paste from the processor surface using a lint-free cloth.

Ê

If the processor is being replaced during a CPU upgrade and may be reused later, store it in a save place.


RX300

Processors

V

CAUTION!


11.4.3.2 Installing the processor

Figure 166: Installing the processor

Ê

Hold the processor with your thumb and index finger.

Ê

Make sure that the four notches on the processor align with the posts on the socket (see close-up).

RX300 S7


Processors

Ê

Lower the processor straight down without tilting or sliding it in the socket.

V

CAUTION!

– Ensure that the processor is level in the socket.

– Be careful not to touch or bend the pins on the processor socket.

– Never touch the underside of the processor. Even minor soiling such as grease from the skin can impair the processor’s operation or destroy the processor.

– Ensure not to scrape or dent the processor edges.


Ê

Carefully lower the load plate over the processor.


RX300

Processors


Ê


Ê


RX300 S7


Processors


Ê



RX300

Processors



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


RX300 S7


Processors

11.5

Handling processor heat sinks




●

●


Installing or removing the processor heat sink:




Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê



RX300

11.5.3 Installing processor heat sinks

Processors

Figure 170: Standard processor heat sink V26898-B977-V1

Figure 171: High performance processor heat sink V26898-B977-V3

RX300 S7


Processors

11.5.3.1 Preparing the heat sink and processor

When installing a new heat sink

Figure 172: Removing the protective heat sink cover

Ê

Remove the protective cover from the heat sink.

V

CAUTION!

Ensure not to touch the heat-conductive paste on the bottom of the heat sink.

When reusing a heat sink

Ê

Ensure that all residual thermal paste has been thoroughly cleaned off the copper surface of the heat sink.

Ê

Apply thermal paste to the processor surface as described in section

"Applying thermal paste" on page 324 .


RX300

11.5.3.2 Installing the heat sink

Processors

H

Figure 173: Installing the heat sink (A)

Ê

Align the heat sink with the uncovered copper heat pipes (H, see above) facing towards the server top.

Ê

Carefully seat the heat sink on the four threaded holes as shown (see closeup).

V

CAUTION!

– Ensure that the screws on the heat sink are properly seated on the threaded holes.

– Ensure that the heat sink cooling fins match the direction of the airflow!

RX300 S7


Processors

Figure 174: Installing the heat sink (B)

Ê

Fasten the four captive screws on the heat sink in a crossover pattern

(screw torque: 0.6 Nm, not applicable for the Japanese market) (1-4).


RX300

11.5.4 Removing processor heat sinks

Processors

Figure 175: Removing the processor heat sink (A)

Ê

Loosen the four captive screws on the heat sink in a crossover pattern (1-4).

RX300 S7


Processors

Figure 176: Removing the processor heat sink (B)

Ê

Carefully turn the heat sink back and forth to detach it from the processor (1).

I

This may be necessary due to the adhesive quality of the thermal paste located between the heat sink and processor.

V

CAUTION!

Pay special attention not to damage any system board components surrounding the processor socket.

Ê

Lift the heat sink out of the chassis (2).

Ê

Thoroughly clean residual thermal paste from the surface of the heat sink and the processor using a lint-free cloth.


RX300

Processors

11.5.5 Replacing processor heat sinks

11.5.5.1 Removing the processor heat sink

Ê

Remove the processor heat sink as described in section


.

11.5.5.2 Applying thermal paste

Ê

Apply thermal paste to the processor surface as described in section

"Applying thermal paste" on page 324

.

11.5.5.3 Installing the processor heat sink

Ê

Install the processor heat sink as described in sections "Preparing the heat sink and processor" on page 318

and

"Installing the heat sink" on page 319 .



Ê


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


RX300 S7


Processors

11.6

Applying thermal paste



I

– For the Japanese market, the service engineer must follow the instruction provided separately.

– If the processor upgrade or replacement kit contains a new CPU heat sink, a thin layer of thermal compound has already been pre-applied to its lower surface. In this case, please proceed with section


.

Figure 177: Thermal paste syringe TC-5026

One thermal compound syringe (A3C40142460 / 34035576) contains thermal paste for two processors.


RX300

Processors

In order to determine the correct amount of thermal paste (equal to 1.0 gram), divide the grey area of the syringe up into two equal segments.

I

Add graduation marks to the syringe using a permanent marker to help you apply the thermal paste.

Figure 178: Applying thermal paste

Ê

Apply a small streak of thermal paste (1.0 gram, see description above) to the center of the processor surface as shown.

V

CAUTION!

Do not mix different types of thermal paste.

RX300 S7


Processors


RX300

12 Accessible drives

This chapter provides information on how to install, remove or replace SATA optical disk drives and backup drives.

Safety notes

V

CAUTION!

●

Before installing an accessible drive, acquaint yourself with the drive's user documentation.

●

●

●

●

●

●

When inserting an accessible drive into the server, ensure not to pinch or strain any connected cables.

When installing an accessible drive, hold it by its sides. Applying force to the top of the casing may cause failures.

When disposing of, transferring, or returning a backup drive, ensure that all backup media has been removed from the drive.





RX300 S7


Accessible drives

12.1 Basic informations

Mounting order for accessible drives in the front panel cage

PRIMERGY RX300 S7 server offers one 5.25-inch accessible drive bays for optical disk drives and backup drives:

Figure 179: Accessible drives in front panel cage

No. Accessible drive

1 Local Service Display

2 Optical disk drive

Bay

3.5-inch bay

5.25 inch bay

Max. no.

1

1

Mounting order for accessible drives in the HDD bays

PRIMERGY RX300 S7 server offers several possibilities to install tape drives:

Figure 180: Accessible drive in HDD bays for 3.5-inch HDD version

Figure 181: Accessible drive (LTO) in HDD bays for 2.5-in HDD version


RX300


Figure 182: Accessible drive (DAT/RDX) in HDD bay for 2.5-in HDD version

RX300 S7



12.2 Installing a Local Service Display (LSD) module




●

●


Installing the LSD: tool-less



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê


Ê



RX300

12.2.3 Removing the LSD dummy cover


Figure 183: Removing the LSD dummy cover

Ê

Take the LSD dummy cover plate by the two recessed grips and pull out the

LSD dummy cover plate.

V

CAUTION!

Save the LSD dummy cover plate for future use.

Always replace dummy modules into unused drive bays to comply with applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements.

RX300 S7



12.2.4 Installing a LSD module

Figure 184: Installing the LSD module

Ê

Insert the LSD module into the bay and push in until it locks in place.


RX300


Figure 185: Installing the LSD module

Ê

Connect the LSD cable to the LSD module (1).

Ê

Connect the LSD cable to the connector SMB1 of the system board (2).

Ê

Route the LSD cable through the upper cable guide (3).



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê


RX300 S7



Ê


12.3 Removing a LSD module




●

●


Removing the LSD: tool-less



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê


Ê



RX300

12.3.3 Removing the LSD module


Figure 186: Removing the LSD cable

Ê

Remove the LSD cable from the LSD module (1) and the connector on the system board (2).

Figure 187: Unlocking the LSD module

Ê

Press in on the locking latch to disengage the LSD module.

RX300 S7



Figure 188: Unlocking the LSD module

Ê

Pull the LSD module out of the 3.5-inch installation frame.

Figure 189: Insert the LSD dummy cover

Ê

Insert the LSD dummy cover plate into the bay.


RX300




Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê


Ê


12.4 Replacing a LSD module




●

●


Replacing the LSD :tool-less



Ê


Ê


RX300 S7



Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê


Ê


12.4.3 Removing the defective LSD module

Ê

"Removing the LSD module" on page 335

12.4.4 Installing the new LSD moduleI

Ê

"Installing a LSD module" on page 332



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê


Ê



RX300


12.5 Installing the optical disk drive (ODD)




●

●


Installing the ODD:




Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê


Ê


RX300 S7



12.5.3 Removing the ODD dummy

Figure 190: Removing the dummy module

Ê

Pull the locking latch upward to unlock the ODD dummy.

V

CAUTION!

Save the ODD dummy for future use.

Always replace dummy modules into unused drive bays to comply with applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements.


RX300


Figure 191: Removing the dummy module

Ê

Pull the ODD dummy out.

RX300 S7



12.5.4 Preparing an ODD

Figure 192: Installing the ODD holder

Ê

Mount the ODD holder to the ODD (1) and secure it with two screws (2).


RX300

12.5.5 Installing an ODD


Figure 193: Installing the ODD

Ê

Run the SATA and power cables through the ODD bay opening as shown.

Ê

Connect the SATA cable to the ODD (1).

Ê

Connect the power cable to the ODD (2)

Ê

Insert the ODD into the bay and push in until it locks in place (3).



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


RX300 S7





Ê


Ê


Ê


12.6 Removing the optical disc drive (ODD)




●

●


Removing the ODD: tool-less



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê





RX300

Ê


Ê


Ê


12.6.3 Removing the ODD


Figure 194: Removing the ODD (A)

Ê

Pull the locking latch upward to unlock the ODD.

RX300 S7



Figure 195: Removing the ODD(B)

Ê

Pull the ODD out of the bay.

Figure 196: Removing the ODD(B)


RX300

Ê

Disconnect the SATA cable (1) and the power cable (2).


Figure 197: Installing the ODD dummy

Ê

Insert the ODD dummy.



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê


Ê


RX300 S7



12.7 Replacing an ODD




●

●


Replacing an ODD:




Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê


Ê



RX300

12.7.3 Removing the defective ODD

Ê

"Removing the ODD" on page 345


Figure 198: Removing the ODD holder

Ê

Remove the two screws (1).

Ê

Remove the ODD holder on the rear of the defective ODD (2).

12.7.4 Installing the new ODD

Ê

"Preparing an ODD" on page 342

Ê

"Installing an ODD" on page 343



Ê


RX300 S7



Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê


Ê



RX300


12.8 Installing an RDX/DAT drive in 3.5-inch version




●

●


Installing accessible drives:




Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê


Ê


RX300 S7



12.8.3 Installing an RDX/DAT drive in the cage

I

– A drive cage is installed

Ê

Remove the drive cage see section "Removing the drive cage" on page 357

.

Ê

Remove the dummy drive.

– 3.5-inch HDDs or 3.5-inch HDD dummy are installed

Ê

Remove HDD/HDD dummy 5 and 6 see section "Removing 3.5inch HDD modules" on page 136

Figure 199: Inserting the RDX/DATdrive

Ê

Insert the RDX/DAT drive into the cage and push in.


RX300


Figure 200: Fastening the RDX/DAT drive in the drive cage

Ê

Fasten the RDX/DAT drive with 4 screws in the drive cage

12.8.4 Installing the RDX/DAT drive

Figure 201: Connecting the cables to the RDX/DAT drive

Ê

Route the power cable through the bay.

Ê

Connect the power adapter cableC16 to the power cable C5(1)

Ê

Connect the power adapter cable C16 to the RDX/DAT drive (2).

Ê

Connect the USB cable C17 to the RDX/DAT drive (3).

RX300 S7



Figure 202: Installing the drive cage with the RDX/DAT drive

Ê

Insert the RDX/DAT drive with the cage into the bay.

Figure 203: Installing the backup drive

Ê

Connect the USB cable to the connector USB INT2 on the system board.


RX300


Ê

Route the cables as shown.



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê


Ê

"Verifying and configuring the backup software solution" on page 97

Ê


12.9 Removing an RDX/DAT drive in 3.5-inch version




●

●


Removing accessible drives:


RX300 S7





Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê

"Removing backup and optical disk media" on page 86

Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê


Ê



RX300

12.9.3 Removing the drive cage


Figure 204: Unlocking the drive cage

Ê

Press the two locking latches together and pull the drive cage out of the bay.

RX300 S7



Figure 205: Removing the cables from the RDX/DAT drive

Ê

Disconnect the power adapter cable from the RDX/DAT drive (1).

Ê

Disconnect the USB cable from the RDX/DAT drive (2).

12.9.4 Removing an RDX/DAT drive out of the cage

Figure 206: Removing the 4 screws

Ê

Remove the 4 screws from the drive cage


RX300


Figure 207: Removing the RDX/DAT drive in the drive cage

Ê

Pull the RDX/DAT drive out of the bay.

Ê

"Installing a 3.5-inch HDD dummy module" on page 138



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê


RX300 S7



Ê


Ê


12.10 Replacing the RDX/DAT drive in 3.5-inch version




●

●


Replacing accessible drive:




Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê





RX300


Ê


Ê


Ê


12.10.3 Removing the defective RDX/DAT drive

Ê

"Removing the drive cage" on page 357

Ê

"Removing an RDX/DAT drive out of the cage" on page 358

12.10.4 Installing the new RDX/DAT drive

Ê

"Installing an RDX/DAT drive in the cage" on page 352

Ê

"Installing the RDX/DAT drive" on page 353



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


RX300 S7



12.11 Installing an RDX/DAT drive in 2.5-inch version




●

●






Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê


Ê




RX300


12.11.3 Installing an RDX/DAT drive in the cage

Ê

Removing the 2.5-inch-HDD cage out of bay 1 for further information see

"Removing HDD cages and front panel cage" on page 491

Figure 208: Inserting the RDX/DATdrive in the drive cage

Ê

Insert the RDX/DAT drive into the bay and push in.

RX300 S7



Figure 209: Fastening the RDX/DAT drive in the drive cage

Ê

Fasten the RDX/DAT drive with 4 screws in the drive cage.


RX300

12.11.4 Installing the RDX/DAT drive


Figure 210: Installing the RDX/DAT drive

Ê

Insert the RDX/DAT with the drive cage in the bay.


Ê

Fasten the drive cage with the screw (1).

Ê

Connecting the USB cable C17 to the RDX/DAT drive (2).

Ê

Connecting the power cable C5 to the RDX/DAT drive (3).

RX300 S7



Figure 212: Removing the backup drive

Ê

Connect the USB cable to the connector USB INT2 on the system board.

Ê




Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê



RX300


Ê


Ê


Ê


12.12 Removing an RDX/DAT drive in 2.5-inch version




●

●






Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


RX300 S7





Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê



Ê

Removing the 2.5-inch-HDD cage out of bay 1.


Ê

Removing the screw that fasten the drive cage(1).

Ê

Disconnecting the USB cable (2).

Ê

Disconnecting the power cable (3).


RX300



Ê

Remove the drive cage.

12.12.4 Removing an RDX/DAT drive out of the cage

Figure 215: Removing the 4 screws

Ê

Remove the 4 screws from the drive cage

RX300 S7



Figure 216: Installing tape dummy

Ê

Insert the tape dummy into the drive cage.


RX300


Figure 217: Installing tape dummy

Ê

Fasten the tape dummy with 2 screws.

Ê

Insert the drive cage into bay 2, for further infomation see "Installing HDD cage and front panel cage" on page 492



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê


RX300 S7



Ê


Ê


12.13 Replacing the RDX/DAT drive in 2.5-inch version




●

●






Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê





RX300


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


12.13.3 Removing the defective RDX/DAT drive

Ê


Ê

"Removing an RDX/DAT drive out of the cage" on page 369

12.13.4 Installing the new RDX/DAT drive

Ê

"Installing an RDX/DAT drive in the cage" on page 363

Ê

"Installing the RDX/DAT drive" on page 365



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


RX300 S7



12.14 Installing an LTO drive in 2.5-inch version




●

●






Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê



RX300



Ê

Remove the screws on the rear side of the drive cage see also


.

Figure 218: Removing the drive cage

Ê

Push the LTO drive out of the bay.

RX300 S7



Figure 219: Removing the cover plate

Ê

Remove the cover plate.


RX300

12.14.4 Removing the tape dummy


Figure 220: Removing the tape dummy

Ê

Remove the four screws.

Ê

Pull out the tape dummy.

RX300 S7



12.14.5 Installing an LTO drive in the cage

Figure 221: Inserting the LTOdrive

Ê

Insert the LTO drive into the bay and push in.


RX300


Figure 222: Fastening the LTO drive in the drive cage

Ê

Fasten the LTOT drive with 4 screws in the drive cage using the upper screw holes.

RX300 S7



Figure 223: Connecting the cover plate

Ê

Connect the cover plate to the LTO drive.


RX300

12.14.6 Installing the LTO cage


Figure 224: Inserting the LTO cage

Ê

Push the LTO cage into the bay.

RX300 S7



Figure 225: Connecting the cables to the LTO

Ê

Fasten the drive cage with the screw (1).

Ê

Connect the cable to the LTO drive (2).

Ê

Connect the cable to the power cable (3).



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê





RX300


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


12.15 Removing an LTO drive in 2.5-inch version




●

●






Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


RX300 S7





Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê

Disconnect the cable from the power cable (1).

Ê

Remove the cable from the LTO drive (2).

Ê

Remove the screw that fixed the drive cage in the bay (3).


RX300


Figure 227: Removing the drive cage

Ê

Pull the drive cage out of the bay.

RX300 S7



12.15.4 Removing an LTO drive out of the cage

Figure 228: Connecting the cover plate

Ê

Connect the cover plate to the LTO drive.

Figure 229: Removing the screws


RX300

Ê

Remove the four screws.


Figure 230: Removing the LTO drive

Ê

Pull the LTO drive out.

RX300 S7



12.15.5 Installing the dummy drive

Figure 231: Installing the dummy drive

Ê

Push the dummy drive into the drive cage.



RX300

Ê

Fasten the dummy drive in the drive cage with 4 screws.



Ê

Fasten the dummy drive in the drive cage with 4 screws.


RX300 S7



Ê

Push the drive cage in.

Ê

Fasten the drive cage with two screws see also "Installing the LTO cage" on page 381

.



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


12.16 Replacing the LTO drive in 2.5-inch version




●

●




RX300





Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


12.16.3 Removing the defective LTO drive

Ê


Ê

"Removing an LTO drive out of the cage" on page 386

12.16.4 Installing the new LTO drive

Ê

"Installing an LTO drive in the cage" on page 378

Ê

"Installing the LTO cage" on page 381

RX300 S7





Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê



RX300

13 Front panel

This chapter provides information on how to replace the front panel module and optional front LAN connector board.

Safety notes

V

CAUTION!

●

When inserting the front panel module into the server, ensure not to pinch or strain any connected cables.

●

●

●


(e.g. by touching a grounded object) before handling electrostaticsensitive devices (ESDs)



RX300 S7


Front panel

13.1 Replacing the front panel module




Note on system information backup / restore

I

The front panel module contains the Chassis ID EPROM that contains system information like server name and model, housing type, serial number and manufacturing data.

To avoid the loss of non-default settings when replacing the system board, a backup copy of important system configuration data is automatically stored from the system board NVRAM to the Chassis ID

EPROM. After replacing the system board the backup data is restored from the Chassis ID board to the new system board.

V

CAUTION!

For that reason the front panel module and system board must not be replaced simultaneously! In this case, restoring the system configuration data on the system board would fail.


●

●


Replacing the front panel module:



RX300

Front panel



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê


Ê


RX300 S7


Front panel

13.1.3 Removing the front panel module

Figure 235: Disconnecting the front panel cable

Ê

Disconnect the front panel cable from the system board.

Ê

If applicable, disconnect the front VGA cable from the system board see

section "Removing the front VGA cable" on page 408

.


RX300

Front panel

Figure 236: Disconnecting front panel cables

Ê

If applicable, disconnect the front LAN board from the system board:

Press in on the locking latch on the front LAN board holder (1) and pull the front LAN board holder with the front LAN board out of its socket (2).

RX300 S7


Front panel

Figure 237: Removing the front panel module

Ê

Push in on the locking latches upward (1) to disengage the locking mechanism.

Ê

Carefully pull the front panel module out of its bay (2).

V

CAUTION!

Ensure that none of the cables are strained or damaged!

Ê

If the front VGA connector has been installed in the defective front panel

module, remove the cable as described in section "Removing the front VGA connector" on page 409 .

Ê

If the front LAN connector has been installed in the defective front panel

module, remove the cable as described in section "Removing the front VGA connector" on page 409 .


RX300

Front panel

13.1.4 Installing the front panel module

Ê

If the front VGA connection is to be installed in the new front panel module,

install the front LAN cable as described in section "Installing the front VGA connector" on page 403

.

Ê

If the front LAN connection is to be installed in the new front panel module,

install the front LAN cable as described in section "Installing the front LAN connector" on page 412

.

Figure 238: Connecting the front panel cable to the front panel module

Ê

Connect the front panel cable to the new front panel module as shown.

RX300 S7


Front panel

Figure 239: Connecting the front panel cable

Ê

Insert the front panel module into the front panel cage and carefully push in until it locks in place.


RX300

Front panel

Figure 240: Connecting front panel cables

Ê

Connect the front panel cable to the system board.

Ê

If applicable, connect the front VGA cable to the front VGA connector of the

system board as described in section "Installing the front VGA connector" on page 403 .

Ê

If applicable, connect the front LAN cable to the system board as describe in section

"Installing the front LAN connector" on page 412 .

RX300 S7


Front panel



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê


Ê

"Verifying system information backup / restore" on page 94

Ê

Store your server’s system information on the Chassis ID EPROM integrated into the front panel board. For further information on how to obtain

and use the ChassisId_Prom Tool, refer to section "Using the Chassis ID

Prom Tool" on page 109

.

Ê


Ê



RX300

Front panel

13.2 Front VGA connector

13.2.1 Installing the front VGA connector



●

●

13.2.1.1 Required tools


Installing the front VGA connector:

– Slotted screw driver for breaking out the front VGA cover plate

– Socket screw driver (5 mm)

13.2.1.2 Preliminary steps


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê


Ê


RX300 S7


Front panel

13.2.1.3 Removing the front panel module

Ê

"Removing the front panel module" on page 396

13.2.1.4 Preparing the front panel module

Figure 241: Breaking out the front VGA cover plate

Ê

Break out the VGA cover plate on the front panel cover.

I

Please note that once removed, the VGA cover plate cannot be refitted.


RX300

13.2.1.5 Installing the front VGA connector

Front panel

Figure 242: Front VAG cable

Ê

Remove the two screws from the connector.

Figure 243: Mounting the front VGA connector

Ê

Insert the front VGA connector.

Ê

Fasten the front VGA connector in the front panel module with two screws.

RX300 S7


Front panel

13.2.1.6 Re-installing the front panel module

Ê

"Installing the front panel module" on page 399


Ê

Run the front panel cable through the cable clamps as shown.

Ê

Connect the front panel cable to the system board (1).

Ê

Connect the front VGA cable to the system board (2).

Ê

If applicable, connect the front LAN connector to the system board.

13.2.1.7 Concluding steps


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê





RX300

Front panel

Ê


Ê


Ê


13.2.2 Removing the front VGA connector



●

●



Removing the front VGA connector:




Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê


Ê


RX300 S7


Front panel

13.2.2.3 Removing the front VGA cable

Figure 245: Disconnecting the front VGA cable

Ê

Remove the front panel cable from the system board (1).

Ê

Remove the front VGA cable from the system board (2).

Ê



RX300

13.2.2.4 Removing the front VGA connector

Front panel

Figure 246: Removing front VGA connector from the front panel module

Ê

Remove two screws.

Ê

Push the VGA connector out of the front panel module.


Ê




Ê


Ê


Ê


RX300 S7


Front panel

Ê




Ê


Ê


Ê


13.2.3 Replacing the front VGA connector



●

●



Replacing the front VGA connector:




Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê





RX300

Front panel

Ê


Ê


Ê



Ê


13.2.3.4 Removing the front VGA connector

Ê

"Removing the front VGA connector" on page 409

.

13.2.3.5 Installing the new front VGA connector

Ê

Install the new front VGA connector as described in section

"Installing the front VGA connector" on page 405 .


Ê


.



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


RX300 S7


Front panel

Ê



.

Ê


13.3 Front LAN connector

13.3.1 Installing the front LAN connector



●

●



Installing the front LAN connector:

– Slotted screw driver for breaking out the front LAN cover plate




Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê



RX300

Front panel

Ê


Ê



Ê


Ê

If applicable remove the front VGA connetor see section

"Removing the front

VGA connector" on page 407

.

13.3.1.4 Preparing the front panel module

Figure 247: Breaking out the front LAN cover plate

Ê

Break out the LAN cover plate on the front panel cover.

I

Please note that once removed, the front LAN cover plate cannot be refitted.

RX300 S7


Front panel

13.3.1.5 Installing the front LAN connector

Figure 248: Front LAN cable T26139-Y4025-V1


Ê



RX300

Front panel

Figure 250: Removing the mounting bracket

Ê

Remove the mounting bracket. Turn the mounting bracket so that the ESD contact springs are not damaged.

Figure 251: Mounting the front LAN connector

RX300 S7


Front panel

Ê

Run the front LAN cable through the mounting bracket.

Ê

Carefully snap the front LAN cable connector into the mounting bracket.


Ê

Insert the mounting bracket. Carefully turn the mounting bracket into place.

Ê

Carefully snap the mounting bracket into the front of the front panel module.


RX300

Front panel

Figure 253: Installing the screws

Ê

Fasten the mounting bracket wth the two screws.

Ê

If applicable install the front VGA connector see section

"Installing the front

VGA connector" on page 403

.


Ê


RX300 S7


Front panel

Figure 254: LAN board kit

1 Front LAN board D2935

Part number: S26361-D2935-A11

2 Front LAN board holder

Part number: A3C40126757

Figure 255: Assembling the front LAN board (A)


RX300

Front panel

Ê

Insert and push the front LAN board into the front LAN holder

(A3C40126757) until the two locking pins in the holder snap in place.

Figure 256: Assembling the front LAN board (B)

Ê

Assembled front LAN board in front LAN holder

Figure 257: Connecting the front LAN cable to the front LAN board

RX300 S7


Front panel

Ê

Connect the front LAN cable to the front LAN board.


Ê

Connect the front panel cable to the system board connector FRONT

PANEL.

Ê

Connect the front LAN board to system board connector FRONT LAN.

I

Ensure that the front LAN board holder snaps in place.



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê



RX300

Front panel



.

Ê


Ê


Ê


RX300 S7


Front panel

13.3.1.8 Using the front management LAN connector

In order to use the front management LAN connector to access the iRMC S3 management controller, please proceed as follows:

Ê

Ensure that Management LAN has been enabled in the BIOS:

Ê

Enter the BIOS.

Ê


Ê

Under iRMC LAN Parameters Configuration, make sure that the

Management LAN setting is set to Enabled.

Ê


I

The front management LAN connector can be used to access the iRMC S3 with either of the Management LAN Port settings enabled,

Management or Shared.

For detailed information on how to access the BIOS and modify settings, refer to the "D2939 BIOS Setup Utility for PRIMERGY

RX300 S7" reference manual.

Ê

Connect a client computer (e.g. notebook) to the front management LAN connector.

I

It is not possible to simultaneously access the iRMC S3 from the front and rear management LAN connectors. As soon as a LAN cable is connected to the front management LAN connector, the iRMC S3 cannot be accessed via the rear management LAN connector.

After removing the LAN cable from the front management LAN connector, the iRMC S3 will immediately become accessible via the rear management LAN connector again.

Ê

Accessing the iRMC S3 using the front management LAN connector is only possible via the preset IP address 192.168.1.1 and cannot be configured otherwise.

Configure your client computer to use any static IP address on subnet

192.168.1.x (except 192.168.1.1) with subnet mask 255.255.255.0.


RX300

Front panel

13.3.2 Removing the front LAN connector



●

●



Removing the front LAN connector:




Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê


Ê


RX300 S7


Front panel

13.3.2.3 Removing the front LAN board

Figure 259: Disconnecting the front LAN board

Ê

Disconnect the front LAN board from the system board:

Press in on the locking latch on the front LAN board holder (1) and pull the front LAN board out of its socket (2).

Ê

Remove the front panel connector see "Removing the front panel module" on page 404

.


RX300

Figure 260: Disconnecting the front LAN cable

Ê

Disconnect the front LAN cable from the front LAN board.

Ê

Remove the front LAN board from the chassis.

Ê


Front panel

RX300 S7


Front panel

13.3.2.4 Removing the front LAN connector


Ê

Remove the remove the two screws.


RX300

Front panel


Ê

Remove the mounting bracket. Turn the mounting bracket so that the ESD contact springs are not damaged.

Figure 263: Removing the front LAN connector from the front panel module

RX300 S7


Front panel

Ê

Remove the front LAN connector carefully. Do not damage the ESD contact springs of the mounting bracket.

Figure 264: Removing the front LAN cable

Ê

Remove the front LAN cable from the mounting bracket.

Figure 265: Mounting mounting bracket


RX300

Front panel

Ê

Carefully insert the mounting bracket.Do not damage the ESD contact springs of the mounting bracket.

Figure 266: Installing the screws

Ê

Fasten the mounting bracke wit the two screws.

Ê




Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


RX300 S7


Front panel

Ê


Ê


13.3.3 Replacing the front LAN connector and board




●

●


Replacing the front LAN connector: tool-less



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê


Ê



RX300

Front panel


Ê

Remove the front panel module as described in section "Removing the front panel module" on page 396 .

13.3.3.4 Removing the front LAN connector

Ê

Remove the defective front LAN connector as described in section

"Removing the front LAN connector" on page 426

.

13.3.3.5 Installing the new front LAN connector

Ê

Install the new front LAN connector as described in section

"Installing the front LAN connector" on page 414

.


Ê


Ê

"Installing the front LAN connector" on page 414



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê



RX300 S7


Front panel

Ê


13.4 Front cage

13.4.1 Removing the front panel cage



●

●



Removing the front LAN connector:




Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê


Ê



RX300

Front panel

13.4.1.3 Removing the front panel cage

Ê

Disconnect all cables from the modules that are installed in the front panel cage.

– Front panel cable:

– Front LAN cable:

– Front VGA cable:

– ODD cable:

– LDS cable:

Large front panel cage

Figure 267: Removing the front panel cage

Ê


Ê

Push the front panel cage out of the chassis frontward.

Ê

Remove the installed modules.

– Front panel module: see section "Removing the front panel module" on page 396

RX300 S7


Front panel

– ODD

– LSD

Small front panel cage

Figure 268: Removing the front panel cage

Ê

Remove the screw.

Ê

Push the front panel cage out of the chassis frontward.

Ê


13.4.1.4 Re-installing the front panel cage

Large front panel cage

Ê

Install the removed modules.

– Front panel module: see section


– ODD


RX300

Front panel

– LSD

Figure 269: Inserting the front panel cage

Ê

Insert the front panel cage.

Ê

Fasten the front panel cage with two screws

Small front panel cage

Ê


RX300 S7


Front panel


Ê

Insert the front panel cage.

Ê

Fasten the front panel cage with thescrews



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê



RX300

Ê


Front panel

RX300 S7


Front panel


RX300

14 System board and components

Safety notes

V

CAUTION!

●


●



●

●



14.1 Replacing the CMOS battery



CMOS memory (volatile BIOS memory) and the real-time clock are powered by a lithium coin cell (CMOS battery). This cell lasts up to ten years, depending on ambient temperature and use.

If the CMOS battery is depleted or falls below minimum voltage levels, it need to be replaced immediately.

Safety notes

V

CAUTION!

●

The CMOS battery must be replaced with an identical battery or with a battery type recommended by the manufacturer.

●

Keep lithium batteries away from children.

RX300 S7


System board and components

●

●

●

Do not throw batteries into the trash can. Lithium batteries must be disposed of in accordance with local regulations concerning special waste.

For further safety information, please refer to section "Environmental protection" in the PRIMERGY RX300 S7 Operating Manual.

Ensure to insert the CMOS battery the with the positive pole facing up!


●

●


Replacing the battery: tool-less; recommended: tooth pick



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê



RX300

14.1.3 Removing the battery


Figure 271: Replacing the CMOS battery (A)

Ê

Press out on the locking spring to eject the depleted CMOS battery (1).

Ê

If the CMOS battery cannot be ejected this way, use a toothpick

(recommended) or similar tool as a lever: Insert the toothpick between the battery and locking spring as shown (2).

V

CAUTION!

Do not use sharp-edged tools like screw drivers as they may damage system board components when slipping.

Ê

Carefully pry the depleted CMOS battery out of its socket as shown (3).

Ê

Remove the CMOS battery (4).

I

Do not throw the CMOS battery into the trash can. Lithium batteries must be disposed of in accordance with local regulations concerning special waste.

RX300 S7



14.1.4 Installing the CMOS battery

Figure 272: Installing the CMOS battery

Ê

At a slight angle, fit the new CMOS battery into its socket as shown (1).

V

CAUTION!

Ensure to insert the CMOS battery with the positive pole (label side) facing up as shown (see close-up).

Ê

Fold down the CMOS battery (2) until it locks in place.

Ê

Ensure that the locking spring (3) is properly engaged.



Ê

Dispose of the CMOS battery in accordance with local regulations concerning special waste.

Ê



RX300


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


RX300 S7



14.2 USB Flash Module (UFM)

This section provides information on how to install, remove or replace the USB

Flash Module (UFM).

14.2.1 Installing the UFM board





●

●


Installing the UFM: tool-less



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê



RX300

Ê


14.2.1.3 Installing the UFM board


Figure 273: UFM kit

Pre-assembled UFM flash module kit (S26361-F3514-V3):

1 2 GB UFM SLC

A3C40104433

2

3

UFM spacer

A3C40109081

UFM nylon screw

A3C40109082

RX300 S7



Figure 274: UFM mounting location

UFM mounting location on the system board:

1 UFM connector

2 Cut-out for UFM spacer


RX300


Figure 275: Installing the UFM board

Ê

Connect the UFM board to the system board, snapping in the UFM spacer.



Ê


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


RX300 S7



14.2.1.5 Software configuration

The UFM delivery set includes the "Recovery Tool CD" to setup the ESXi configuration. Proceed as follows:

Ê


Ê

Right after switching on the server, insert the "Recovery Tool CD" into the

DVD drive and close the drive tray.

Ê

The server should now boot from the "Recovery Tool CD".

Ê

Follow the on-screen instructions.

14.2.2 Removing the UFM board



●

●



Removing the UFM:



RX300




Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê


14.2.2.3 Removing the UFM board

Figure 276: Removing the UFM board (A)

RX300 S7



Ê

Remove the nylon screw on the defective UFM board (1).

Ê

Disconnect and remove the defective UFM board (2).

Figure 277: Removing the UFM board (B)

Ê

The UFM spacer remains on the system board.



Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê



RX300


Ê


14.2.3 Replacing the UFM board





●

●


– combination pliers and flat nose pliers

Replacing the UFM:




Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê


RX300 S7



14.2.3.3 Removing the UFM

Ê

"Removing the UFM board" on page 448

Ê

The UFM spacer remains on the system board.

14.2.3.4 Re-installing the UFM

Figure 278: Preparing the new UFM board

Ê

Remove the nylon screw from the new UFM board (1).

Ê

Remove the UFM spacer (2).


RX300


Figure 279: Installing the UFM board (A)

Ê

Fit the new UFM board on the UFM connector and the remaining UFM spacer.

Figure 280: Installing the UFM board (B)

RX300 S7



Ê

Fit the new UFM board on the UFM connector and the remaining UFM spacer (1).

Ê

Secure the UFM board to the UFM spacer with the nylon screw (2).

Destroying the defective UFM board

V

CAUTION!

The UFM board contains customer information (e.g. IP address, license numbers). After replacing the UFM, hand the defective UFM board over to the customer. If the customer requests disposal of the defective UFM board, proceed as follows:

Figure 281: Destroying the defective UFM board

Ê

Use a pair of combination pliers (1) and flat nose pliers (2) to break the UFM board in half as shown.


RX300




Ê


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


14.2.3.6 Software configuration

The UFM delivery set includes the "Recovery Tool CD" to setup the ESXi configuration. Proceed as follows:

Ê


Ê

Right after switching on the server, insert the "Recovery Tool CD" into the

DVD drive and close the drive tray.

Ê

The server should now boot from the "Recovery Tool CD".

Ê

Follow the on-screen instructions.

RX300 S7



14.3 Trusted Platform Module (TPM)

14.3.1 Installing the TPM board





●

●



Installing the TPM:

– Bit screw driver

– TPM bit insert

(

*

)

(

*

)


– TPM module fixing tool (S26361-F3552-L909)



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê





RX300

Ê


Ê


14.3.1.3 Installing the TPM board


Figure 282: TPM kit

TPM kit (S26361-F3299-E2):

1

2

3

TPM module

S26361-D2727-A10

TPM spacers

I

Use the white TPM spacer (A3C40106008).

The black TPM spacer is not used in this server.

TPM special screw

C26192-Y10-C176

4 TPM bit insert for TPM special screw

RX300 S7



Figure 283: TPM mounting location

TPM mounting location on the system board:

1 TPM connector

2 Cut-out for TPM spacer

Figure 284: Installing the TPM spacer

Ê

Snap the TPM spacer into the cut-out in the system board.


RX300


Figure 285: Installing the TPM board

Ê

Connect the new TPM board to the system board.

Figure 286: TPM bit insert

Ê

Attach the TPM bit insert or TPM module fixing tool (Japanese market) to a bit screw driver.

RX300 S7



Figure 287: Securing the TPM board

Ê

Secure the TPM board with the TPM screw using the TPM bit insert.

I

Do not fasten the screw too firmly. Stop as soon as the head of the screw lightly touches the TPM board.



Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê


Ê

Enable TPM in the system board BIOS. Proceed as follows:


RX300


Ê

Switch on or restart your server.

Ê

As soon as the startup screen appears, press the [F2] function key to enter the BIOS.

Ê


Ê

Select the Trusted Computing submenu.

Ê

Set the TPM Support and TPM State settings to Enabled.

Ê

Under Pending TPM operation, select the desired TPM operation mode.

Ê


I

For detailed information on how to access the BIOS and modify settings, refer to the "System Board D2939 BIOS Setup Utilty" reference manual available online at



Ê


RX300 S7



14.3.2 Removing the TPM board



V

CAUTION!

Advise your contact persons that they must provide you with TPM backup copies. For security reasons, the TPM must be restored/resaved by the customer. After installing a new system board, the TPM must be enabled. You may not clear the TPM data.

If the contact persons DO NOT have a backup copy available, inform them that replacing the TPM board will cause to lose all data.

●

●


●


Removing the system board:


Removing the TPM:

– thin slotted screw driver (

2 x 0.4 mm)


– Dedicated TPM screw driver (CWZ8291A)


RX300




Ê

Before removing the TPM board, it is necessary to remove BitLockerprotection from the computer and to decrypt the volume.

Ask the system administrator to turn off BitLocker-protection using the

BitLocker setup wizard available either from the Control Panel or Windows

Explorer:

Ê

Open Bitlocker Drive Encryption by clicking the Start button, clicking


Encryption.

I

Administrator permission required If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the password or provide confirmation.

Ê

To turn off BitLocker and decrypt the volume, click Turn Off BitLocker, and then click Decrypt the volume.

I

Decrypting the volume may be time-consuming. By decrypting the volume, all of the information stored on that computer is decrypted.

For further information on how to disable BitLocker drive encryption, please refer to the Microsoft Knowledge Base.

Fujitsu service partners will find additional information (also available in Japanese) on the Fujitsu Extranet web pages.

Ê

Disable TPM in the system board BIOS. Proceed as follows:

Ê

Switch on or restart your server.

Ê

As soon as the startup screen appears, press the [F2] function key to enter the BIOS.

Ê


Ê

Select the Trusted Computing submenu.

Ê

Set the TPM Support and TPM State settings to Disabled.

RX300 S7



Ê


I

For detailed information on how to access the BIOS and modify settings, refer to the "System Board D2939 BIOS Setup Utilty" reference manual available online at



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê



RX300


14.3.2.3 Removing the TPM board

Ê

"Removing the system board" on page 479 .

Ê

Lay the system board on a soft, antistatic surface with its component side facing down.

Figure 288: Removing the TPM screw

Ê

Locate the slotted lower end of the TPM screw (1).

Ê

Carefully loosen the TPM screw using a thin slotted screw driver (e.g. watchmaker's screw driver) or the dedicated TPM screw driver (Japanese market) (2).

V

CAUTION!

Ensure to turn the screw clockwise in order to remove it!

Slowly and carefully increase the pressure on the screw until it begins to turn. The effort when loosing the screw should be as low as possible.

RX300 S7



Otherwise the thin metal bar may break, rendering it impossible to loosen the screw.

Ê

Remove the TPM screw (3).

Ê

Remove the defective TPM board on the upper side of the system board.

Figure 289: Removing the TPM spacer

Ê

Using a small pair of combination pliers, press together the hooks on the

TPM spacer (see close-up) and remove it from the system board.

I

If the TPM module is to be replaced, the TPM spacer may remain on the system board.



Ê


Ê


Ê



RX300




.

Ê


Ê


14.3.3 Replacing the TPM board



V

CAUTION!

Advise your contact persons that they must provide you with TPM backup copies. For security reasons, the TPM must be restored/resaved by the customer. After installing a new system board, the TPM must be enabled. You may not clear the TPM data.


●

●


●


Removing the system board:


Replacing the TPM:


– TPM bit insert

(

*

)

– thin slotted screw driver ( 2 x 0.4 mm)

(

*

)

(

*

)




RX300 S7





Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê


14.3.3.3 Removing the TPM

Ê

Remove the TPM board as described in section

"Removing the TPM board" on page 462

.

Ê

Leave the TPM spacer on the system board when removing the defective

TPM board.


RX300

14.3.3.4 Re-installing the TPM


Figure 290: TPM spacer

Ê

The TPM spacer is already present on the system board.

Ê

Re-install the TPM board as described in section "Installing the TPM board" on page 456 .



Ê


Ê


.

Ê




.

Ê


RX300 S7



Ê


Ê


14.4 Onboard SKU key

The onboard SKU key needs to be installed in order to enable SAS connector

SAS 1-4 on the system board.

14.4.1 Installing the onboard SKU key



●

●



Replacing the onboard SKU key: tool-less



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê

"Removing the air duct" on page 70 .


RX300

14.4.1.3 Installing the onboard SKU key


Figure 291: Onboard SKU key mounting location

Ê

Locate the onboard SKU key mounting location on the system board.


Ê

Connect the onboard SKU key to system board connector

UGP-ROM.



RX300 S7



Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê


.

14.4.2 Removing the onboard SKU key



●

●



Removing the onboard SKU key: tool-less



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê



RX300

Ê


.

14.4.2.3 Removing onboard SKU key



Ê

Firmly pull up on the release lash until the onboard SKU key pops out of its connector.



Ê


Ê


Ê


RX300 S7





Ê


Ê


.

14.4.3 Replacing the onboard SKU key



●

●



Replacing the onboard SKU key: tool-less



Ê


Ê


.

Ê


Ê


Ê




Ê


Ê



RX300


14.4.3.3 Replacing the onboard SKU key

Ê

Remove the defective onboard SKU key as described in section "Removing onboard SKU key" on page 473

.

Ê

Install the new onboard SKU key as described in section

"Installing the onboard SKU key" on page 471

.



Ê


.

Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê


14.5 Replacing the system board




Note on TPM

I

The system board can be equipped with an optional TPM (Trusted

Platform Module). This module enables third party programs to store key information (e. g. drive encryption using Windows Bitlocker Drive

Encryption).

RX300 S7



If the customer is using TPM functionality, the TPM has to be removed from the defective system board and connected to the new system

board. For a detailed description, please refer to section "Replacing the

TPM board" on page 467 .

The TPM is activated in the system BIOS.

V

CAUTION!

– Before replacing the system board, ask the customer whether TPM functionality is used.

– If the customer is using TPM functionality, remove the TPM from the old system board and install it on the new system board.

Advise your contact persons that they must provide you with TPM backup copies. For security reasons, the TPM must be restored / resaved by the customer. After installing a new system board the TPM must be enabled. You may not clear the TPM data.


Note on system information backup / restore

I

The front panel module contains the Chassis ID EPROM that contains system information like server name and model, housing type, serial number and manufacturing data.

To avoid the loss of non-default settings when replacing the system board, a backup copy of important system configuration data is automatically stored from the system board NVRAM to the Chassis ID

EPROM. After replacing the system board the backup data is restored from the Chassis ID board to the new system board.

V

CAUTION!

For that reason the front panel module and system board must not be replaced simultaneously! In this case, restoring the system configuration data on the system board would fail.


RX300



I




●

●

●


Replacing the system board:


Replacing the system board:

– Magnifying glass for inspecting CPU socket springs (recommended)

If a TPM module is installed:


– TPM bit insert

(

*

)

– thin slotted screw driver (

2 x 0.4 mm)

(

*

)

(

*

)




RX300 S7





Ê

Ensure to note down your current network settings in the operating system.



Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê

Disconnect all external cables.

Ê




Ê


Ê



RX300


14.5.3 Removing the system board

Ê


Ê

"Removing the power backplane" on page 126

Ê

Remove all cables from the system board.

Ê

Remove the following components from the system board as shown in the related sections:

– Heat sink: see

section "Removing processor heat sinks" on page 321

I

Leave the processor on the defective board for now.

– Memory modules: see section

"Removing memory modules" on page 276

I

Ensure to take note of the memory modules’ mounting positions for reassembly.

– Expansion cards: see section "Removing expansion cards" on page 188

I

Ensure to take note of the controllers’ mounting positions and cable connections for reassembly.

– UFM board: see section

"Removing the UFM board" on page 448

– SKU key: see section "Removing the onboard SKU key" on page 472

– SAS RAID controller: see section

"Removing the SAS RAID controller" on page 199

RX300 S7



Figure 294: Detaching the system board

Ê

Remove 13 screws from the system board (see circles).

I

If there was an SAS RAID controller installed the screw (1) is remove allready.

Figure 295: Removing the system board (B)


RX300


Ê

Slightly lift up the system board by the memory module ejectors and a PCI slot (1) in order to detach it from the centering bolts (C).

Ê

Carefully shift the system board towards the server front until the plug shells disengage from the cut-outs in the connector panel.

Ê

Hold the defective system board by the memory module ejectors and a PCI slot and at a slight angle lift it out of the chassis.

Ê

"Removing the TPM board" on page 465

Ê

Remove the UFM spacer from the systemboard

14.5.4 Installing the system board

14.5.4.1 Mounting the system board

Figure 296: Installing the system board

Ê

Hold the new system board by the memory module ejectors and a PCI slot.

V

CAUTION!

– Do not lift or handle the system board by any of its heat sinks!

RX300 S7



– Ensure not to damage the EMI springs to comply with applicable

EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements and fire protection measures.

Ê

At a slight angle, lower the system board into the chassis.

Ê

Carefully shift the system board towards the server rear until the plug shells engage with the cut-outs in the connector panel (1).

Ê

Lower the system board onto the centering bolts (C).

Ensure that the system board is properly seated on both centering bolts.

Figure 297: Securing the system board

Ê

Secure the system board with 13 screws (M3 x 6 mm, C26192-Y10-C68)

(see circles).

I

If you want to install a SAS RAID controller, do not insert the screw markt with (1).

I

Screw torque: 0.6 Nm (not applicable for the Japanese market)

Tighten the screws in a cross diagonal pattern.

Ê

Verify the settings on the new system board (jumpers).

I

For a detailed description, please refer to section

"Onboard settings" on page 533 .


RX300


14.5.4.2 Swapping processors

Preparing the processor socket load plates on the new system board

Ê

"Opening the load plate of the processor socket" on page 284

Removing processors from the defective system board

Ê

Carefully remove the processors from their sockets on the defective system board as described in

"Removing the processor" on page 299 .

V

Remove and reinstall one processor at a time. Do not remove the second processor from the defective system board until the first processor has been installed on the new system board.

Installing processors on the new system board

Ê

Install the processors on the new system board as described in

"Installing the processor" on page 288 .

Installing protective socket covers on the defective system board

I

Since the defective system board is sent back for repair, protect the delicate processor socket springs with a socket cover.

Ê

"Installing the protective cover" on page 301


Ê

Reconnect all cables to the system board. For a complete cabling overview, please refer to section

"Cables overview" on page 513

.

Ê

Reinstall all remaining system board components as shown in the related sections:

– SAS RAID controller: see section


– SKU key: see section "Installing the onboard SKU key" on page 470

– Heat sinks: see section "Installing processor heat sinks" on page 317

– Memory modules: see section

"Installing a memory module" on page 273

I

Install all memory modules into their original slots.

RX300 S7



– Expansion cards: see section "Installing expansion cards" on page 183

I

Install all expansion cards into their original slots.

– UFM board: install the UFM spacer to the system board and install the

UFM board see section

"Installing the UFM board" on page 444

– TPM board (if applicable): see section "Installing the TPM board" on page 456

Ê

"Installing the power backplane" on page 128

Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê

If applicable, activate TPM functionality in the system BIOS under Security >

TPM (Security Chip) Setting > Security Chip. For more information, refer to the

"D2939 BIOS Setup Utility for PRIMERGY RX300 S7 / TX120 S3 Reference

Manual".

Ê




Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê



.

Ê

After replacing the system board in a server running Linux OS,

"Updating the

NIC configuration file in a Linux environment" on page 104


RX300


Ê


Ê


Ê

Reconfigure your network settings in the operation system according to the original configuration of the replaced controller (expansion card or onboard).

I




Ê


"After replacing the system board" on page 110

.

RX300 S7




RX300

15 Conversion configurations



Safety notes

V

CAUTION!

●


15.1 Basic information

15.1.1 Supported conversions

Start Configuration Final Configuration

1

6x 3.5-inch

HDD n.a .

4

8x 2.5-inch

HDD

2

4x 2.5-inch

HDD 7

3

4x 2.5-inch

HDD + LTO

3

6

12x 2.5-inch

HDD

4x 2.5-inch

HDD + LTO

8x 2.5-inch

HDD+LTO

4

8x 2.5-inch

HDD

7

8

12x 2.5-inch

HDD

16x 2.5-inch

HDD

Upgrade kit #

S26361-F1373-L424

S26361-F1373-L427

S26361-F1373-L423

S26361-F1373-L436

S26361-F1373-L247

S26361-F1373-L248

RX300 S7


Conversion configurations

7

8

5

6

8x 2.5-inch

HDD +RDX

8x 2.5-inch

HDD + LTO

12x 2.5inch HDD

16x 2.5inch HDD n.a.

n.a.

8 n.a.

16x 2.5-inch

HDD

S26361-F1373-L378

15.1.2 SAS cabling

Config

1

2

2 (with controller)

3

4

Cable from to

C10 X1 - 6x 3.5-inch HDD Bpl MLC1 -SAS controller

C10 X1 - 4x 2.5-inch HDD Bpl SAS1-4 system board


5

6

7

8









C9 X2 - 12x 2.5-inch HDD Bpl MLC2-SAS controller

C7 X1 - 4x 2.5-inch HDD Bpl X3 - 12x 2.5-inch HDD Bpl




RX300


15.2 Basic Procedures


●

●


Converting the server model:


– Slotted screw driver



Ê


Ê

"Disabling BitLocker functionality" on page 83 .

Ê




.

Ê


Ê


Ê

Remove all external cables.

Ê

"Removing the server cover" on page 69 .

Ê


Ê


15.2.3 Removing the front cover

I

The Removing of the front cover for all versions is to proceed in the same way.

RX300 S7



Figure 298: Removing the rack front cover (A)

Ê

Disengage all tabs of the front cover.

Figure 299: Removing the rack front cover (B)

Ê

Carefully remove the front cover. Do not damage the hooks of the front cover.


RX300


15.2.4 Removing HDD cages and front panel cage

bay 1 bay 2 bay 3 bay 4/5

Figure 300: Bays to install HDD cages and the large frontpanel

bay 1

bay 2 bay 3

bay 4 bay 5

Figure 301: Bays to install HDD cages and the small frontpanel

bay 4/5 bay 3 bay 2 bay 1

Figure 302: Removing HDD cages and front panel cage

For removing the bays:

– Remove the cables from the HDD backplane or the front panel module, that you want to remove.

RX300 S7



– Remove the screw from the HDD cage or the two screws from the front panel cage, that you want to remove (see circles).

15.2.5 Installing HDD cage and front panel cage bay 4/5 bay 3 bay 2 bay 1

Figure 303: Installing HDD cages and front panel cage

For installing the bays:

– Insert the screw from the concerning HDD cage or the two screws from the front panel cage (see circles).

– Connect the cables to the HDD backplane or the front panel module.

Depending on the start configuration and the end configuration you must exchange the cables of the SAS cabling. See in the following sections and the sction

"Cabling" on page 516


RX300

15.2.6 Installing the front cover

15.2.6.1 Large front panel cage in bay 4/5


Figure 304: Installing the front cover for configurations with the large front panel cage

Ê

Insert the front cover starting with the right side. Regard the noses see close-up.

I

Regard that all tabs will be engaged in the recesses.

RX300 S7



15.2.6.2 Small front panel cage in bay 5

Figure 305: Installing the front cover for configurations with the smal l front panel cage

Ê

Insert the front cover.

I

Regard that all tabs will be engaged in the recesses.


RX300


15.3 Converting

15.3.1 Configuration 2 to configuration 4

I

The configuration 2 must include a SAS controller. Otherwise you must install a SAS controller as described in section


.

Figure 306: Removing the HDD dummy

Ê

Remove the HDD dummy from bay 2.

RX300 S7



Figure 307: Removing the cover plate from the HDD dummy

Ê

Remove the cover plate from the HDD dummy.


RX300


Figure 308: Installing the cover plate

Ê

Insert the cover plate.

Figure 309: Installing the HDD cage

RX300 S7



Ê

Insert the HDD cage.

Ê

Remove cable C10 from the connector MLC1 of the 4x 2.5-inch SAS backplane (1).

Figure 310: Connecting SAS cables

Ê

Connect cable C10 to the connector MLC2 of the 4x 2.5-inch SAS backplane (1).

Ê

Connect the cable C9 to X1 of the 4x 2.5-inch SAS backplane (2) and the

MLC1 of thte SAS controller (3).

Ê



I

The configuration 2 must include a SAS controller. Otherwise you must

install a SAS controller as described in section "Installing the SAS RAID controller" on page 195 .


RX300


Figure 311: Removing the HDD cage and HDD dummys

Ê

Remove all cables from the HDD cage backplane.

Ê

Remove the HDD cage and the HDD dummys from bay 1 and 2.


Ê


RX300 S7



Figure 313: Installing the cover plate to a HDD cage.

Ê

Insert the cover plate to one of the HDD cages.

Ê

"Removing the 4x 2.5-inch SAS HDD backplane" on page 162

Figure 314: Installing the HDD cages


RX300


Ê

Insert the HDD cages. The HDD cage with the cover plate must be installed into bay 2.

Figure 315: Installing the 12x 2.5-inch HDD backplane

Ê

Insert the 12x 2.5-inch HDD backplane in the guiding recesses.

Ê

Fold the 12x 2.5-inch HDD backplane.


Ê

Fasten the 12x 2.5-inch HDD backplane with three screws.

Ê

Remove cable C10 from the connector MLC1 of the SAS controller (1).

RX300 S7




Ê

Connect cable C5 to the connector X17 of the 12x 2.5-inch SAS backplane (1).

Ê


Ê

Connect the cable C9 to X1 of the 12x 2.5-inch SAS backplane (3) and the connector MLC1 of the SAS controller (4).

Ê


Ê



I

The configuration 2 must include a SAS controller. Otherwise you must

install a SAS controller as described in section "Installing the SAS RAID controller" on page 195 .


RX300


Figure 318: Removing the HDD dummys

Ê

Remove the HDD dummys.


Ê


Ê

Prepare the LTO drive see section "Installing an LTO drive in 2.5-inch version" on page 374 .

RX300 S7



Figure 320: Installing LTO drive

Ê

Insert the LTO drive.

Figure 321: Connecting LTO drive cables

Ê

Connect the cable C18 to LTO drive (1).

Ê

Connect the power cable to the connector of the power cable (2).

Ê

Connect the cable C18 to the connector SAS 1-4 of the system (3).

Ê

Insert the SKU key see section

"Installing the onboard SKU key" on page 470

(4).


RX300


Ê



15.3.4.1 Replacing the front cages

Figure 322: Replacing front cages (A)

Ê

Remove the front panel cable from the system board.

Ê

If applicable remove the optional front LAN and front VGA cables from the system board see sections

"Removing the front LAN connector" on page 423 and

"Removing the front VGA connector" on page 407

.

Ê

Remove the front panel cage.

RX300 S7



Figure 323: Replacing front cages (B)

Ê

"Installing the 4x 2.5-inch HDD SAS backplane" on page 163

Ê

"Installing the HDD cage" on page 164

Ê

Insert the front panel cage as described in section

"Re-installing the front panel cage" on page 434

.

Figure 324: Connecting the front panel cable

Ê

Connect the front panel cable to the system board.


RX300


Ê

If applicable connect the optional front LAN and front VGA cables to the

system board see sections "Installing the front LAN connector" on page 412

and "Installing the front VGA connector" on page 403 .

Figure 325: Connecting cables

Ê

Connect the power cable to the connector of the power cable (1).

Ê

Connect the cable C11 to connector X1 of the 4x 2.5-inch HDD backplane (2) and the connector MLC2 of the SAS controller (3).

Ê


RX300 S7




Figure 326: Removing the HDD cages and HDD dummy cover

Ê

Remove the HDD cage and the HDD dummy.

Ê

Remove the 4x 2.5-inch HDD backplanes from the HDD cages see section

"Removing the 4x 2.5-inch SAS HDD backplane" on page 162 .

Figure 327: Installing the HDD cages


RX300


Ê

Insert the HDD cages. The cage with the cover plate must be installed into bay 2.


Ê

Insert the 12x 2.5-inch HDD backplane in the guiding recesses.

Ê

Fold the 12x 2.5-inch HDD backplane.


Ê

Fasten the 12x 2.5-inch HDD backplane with three screws.

Ê

Remove cable C10 from the connector MLC2 of thte SAS controller.

RX300 S7




Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê



Ê

Convert Configuration 4 to configuration 7 see section

"Configuration 4 to configuration 7" on page 508

.

Ê

Replace the small front cage with the large front cage as described in

section "Replacing the front cages" on page 505 .

Ê

Connect cable C7 from connector X1 of the 4x 2.5-inch SAS backplane to connector X3 of the 12x 2.5-inch SAS backplane


RX300



Ê

Replace the small front cage with the large front cage as described in section

"Replacing the front cages" on page 505

.

Ê

Connect cable C7 from connector X1 of the 4x 2.5-inch SAS backplane to connector X3 of the 12x 2.5-inch SAS backplane

15.4 Concluding steps


Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê




.

Ê


Ê


Ê


Ê

Update your server’s chassis information on the Chassis ID EPROM integrated into the front panel board. For further information on how to obtain

and use the ChassisId_Prom Tool, refer to section "Using the Chassis ID

Prom Tool" on page 109 .

Ê


RX300 S7




RX300

16 Cables

This chapter provides information on how to connect, disconnect and route cables.

Safety notes

V

CAUTION!

●

Always hold cables by their connectors when disconnecting them.

Never pull on the cable to disconnect cables.

●

●

●

Ensure that none of the cables are scraped, strained or otherwise damaged while replacing system components.

Immediately replace cables with damaged shielding.

Always use shielded network cables.

In this chapter

●

"Cables overview" on page 513

●

"Cabling" on page 516

16.1 Cables overview

No Name

C1

C2

LTG PWR

SB 150

LTG SMB

PWR-BP

Cable number

T26139-

Y3758-V10

T26139-

Y4027-V2

C3

LTG PWR

SAS-BP

3.5

T26139-

Y3939-V501

Table 10: List of used cables

Routing

Configuration

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

from power backplane to system board from power backplane to system board

6x 3.5-inch SAS

BP to system board o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

RX300 S7


Cables

No Name

Cable number

Routing

Configuration

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

C4

C5

C6

C7

C8

C9

C10

C11

LTG PWR

SAS-BP

T26139-

Y3939-V201

LTG PWR

3ST 600

LTG

COMMON

FP

T26139-

Y3986-V303

T26139-

Y4015-V1

LTG SAS

2XMINI

110

LTG SAS

2XMINI

320

LTG SAS

2XMINI

470

T26139-

Y3963-V111

T26139-

Y3963-V101

T26139-

Y3963-V103

2.5-inch SAS

BP(s) to system board

SAS BP(s) to

DVD drive

Front panel to system board

4x 2.5-inch SAS

BP to 12x2.5inch SAS BP

SAS BP to SAS controller

LTG SAS

2XMIN

540

LTG SAS

2XMIN

650

T26139-

Y3963-V107

C12 LTG LVP T26139-

Y3718-V301

C13 LTG LAN

FP

T26139-

Y4025-V1

C14 LTG INT

VGA 500

T26139-

Y3963-V116

T26139-

Y3994-V101 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

2.5-inch SAS BP to SAS controller o

2 x o

2.5-inch SAS BP to SAS on system board/SAS controller

4x2.5-inch SAS

BP to SAS controller

LSD to system board (optional)

Front LAN to system board

(optional)

Front VGA to system board

(optional) o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

2 x o



RX300

Cables

No Name

C15 LTG SATA

2XGER

750

C16 LTG PWR

RDX 400

C17 LTG INT

USB 700

Cable number

T26139-

Y3928-V205

T26139-

Y2193-V501

T26139-

Y3973-V96

C18 LTG

MSAS-

HDDA

C19 LTG IBBU

160

C20 LTG IBBU

550

C21 CBL

FBU02

170

T26139-

Y3969-V351

T26139-

Y3987-V3

T26139-

Y3987-V2

T26139-

Y4032-V3


Routing

DVD to system board (optional)

RDX/DAT to DVD

(optiona)

RDX/DAT to system board

(optiona)

LTO to system board o o

IBBU to SAS controller o

Configuration

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

o o o o o o o o o o

RX300 S7


Cables

16.2 Cabling

16.2.1 Configuration 1

Power

Backpl

P

W

R

T

R

L

P

W

R

C

C 1

C 2

P

W

R

MoBo

T

R

L

P

W

R

C

Frontpanel

Front V G A

Front LAN

S MB 1

SATA 1

PW R H D D /O D D

U SB 1

SAS

Controller 1

M LC 1

M LC 2 iBBU

C 6

C 17

C 19

C 14

C 13

C 12

C 3

C 9

C 8

C 15

Frontpanel

+ 2x USB

Front V G A (optional)

Front LAN (optional)

LSD

(opt.)

DVD

(opt.)

D ata

PW R

C 5

SAS BP

6 x 3.5“

X10

X9

X1

X2

C 16

RDX/DAT

(opt.)

PW R

U SB

iBBU

Figure 331: Cabling 6x 3.5-inch HDD with optional RDX/DAT


RX300

Cables


Power

Backpl

P

W

R

P

W

R

C

T

R

L

C 1

C 2

P

W

R

MoBo

P

W

R

C

T

R

L

Frontpanel

Front V G A

Front LAN

S MB 1

SATA 1

PW R H D D /O D D

SAS 1-4

C 6

C 14

C 13

C 12

C 15

C 5

C 4

C 10

Frontpanel

+ 2x USB



LSD

(opt.)

DVD

(opt.)

D ata

PW R

SAS BP

4 x 2.5“

X9

X6

X1

Figure 332: Cabling - 4x 2.5-inch HDD model

RX300 S7


Cables


Power

Backpl

P

W

R

T

R

L

P

W

R

C

C 6

C 2

C 14

C 1

C 13

C 12

C 15

P

W

R

MoBo

T

R

L

P

W

R

C

Frontpanel

Front V G A

Front LAN

S MB 1

SATA 1

PW R H D D /O D D

C 5

C 4

C 18

C 10

SAS

Controller 1

SAS 1-4

M LC 1

M LC 2

M LC 1 iBBU

C 19

iBBU

Figure 333: Cabling - 4x 2.5-inch HDDmodel with LTO drive

Frontpanel

+ 2x USB



LSD

(opt.)

DVD

(opt.)

D ata

PW R

SAS BP

4 x 2.5“

X9

X6

X1

LTO

(opt.)

SAS/PW R


RX300

Cables


Power

Backpl

P

W

R

P

W

R

C

T

R

L

C 1

C 2

C 6

C 14

C 13

C 12

C 15

C 5

P

W

R

MoBo

P

W

R

C

T

R

L

Frontpanel

Front V G A

Front LAN

S MB 1

SATA 1

PW R H D D /O D D

SAS

Controller 1

SAS 1-4

M LC 1

M LC 2

M LC 1 iBBU

C 4

C 9

C 19

iBBU

Figure 334: Cabling -8x 2.5-inch HDD model

C 10

Frontpanel

+ 2x USB



LSD

(opt.)

DVD

(opt.)

D ata

PW R

SAS BP

4 x 2.5“

X9

X6

X1

X6

X1

SAS BP

4 x 2.5“

X9

RX300 S7


Cables


Power

Backpl

P

W

R

T

R

L

P

W

R

C

C 6

C 2

C 14

C 1

P

W

R

MoBo

T

R

L

P

W

R

C

Frontpanel

Front V G A

Front LAN

S MB 1

SATA 1

PW R H D D /O D D

U SB 1

SAS 1-4

M LC 1

SAS

Controller 1

M LC 2 iBBU

C 17

C 10

C 4

C 13

C 12

C 19

iBBU

C 15

C 8

C 5

Figure 335: Cabling -8x 2.5-inch HDD model with RDX/DAT drive

Frontpanel

+ 2x USB



LSD

(opt.)

DVD

(opt.)

D ata

PW R

SAS BP

4 x 2.5“

X9

X6

X1

RDX/DAT

(opt.)

PW R

D ata

X6

X1

SAS BP

4 x 2.5“

X9


RX300

Cables


Power

Backpl

P

W

R

P

W

R

C

T

R

L

C 6

C 1

C 2

C 14

C 13

P

W

R

MoBo

P

W

R

C

T

R

L

Frontpanel

Front V G A

Front LAN

S MB 1

SATA 1

PW R H D D /O D D

SAS 1-4

SAS

Controller 1

M LC 1

M LC 2

M LC 1 iBBU

C 19

iBBU

C 10

C 4

C 11

C 18


C 5

Frontpanel

+ 2x USB



SAS BP

4 x 2.5“

X9

X6

X1

X6

X1

SAS BP

4 x 2.5“

X9

LTO

(opt.)

SAS/PW R

RX300 S7


Cables


Power

Backpl

P

W

R

T

R

L

P

W

R

C

C 1

C 2

C 6

C 14

C 13

C 12

P

W

R

MoBo

T

R

L

P

W

R

C

Frontpanel

Front V G A

Front LAN

S MB 1

SATA 1

PW R H D D /O D D

SAS

Controller 1

SAS 1-4

M LC 1

M LC 2

M LC 1 iBBU

C 4

C 19

iBBU

Figure 337: Cabling - 12x2.5-inch HDD model

C 15

C 5

C 9

C 9

Frontpanel

+ 2x USB



LSD

(opt.)

DVD

(opt.)

D ata

PW R

SAS BP

12 x2.5“

X3

X17

X15

X1

X2


RX300

Cables


Power

Backpl

P

W

R

T

R

L

P

W

R

C

C 1

C 2

C 6

C 14

C 13

P

W

R

MoBo

T

R

L

P

W

R

C

Frontpanel

Front V G A

Front LAN

S MB 1

SATA 1

PW R H D D /O D D

SAS 1-4

SAS

Controller 1

M LC 1

M LC 2

M LC 1 iBBU

C 19

C 4

iBBU

C 7

C 9

C 9

Frontpanel

+ 2x USB



X9

X6

X1

SAS BP

4 x 2.5“

SAS BP

12 x2.5“

X3

X17

X15

X1

X2


RX300 S7


Cables


RX300

17 Appendix

17.1 Mechanical overview

17.1.1 Server front

Front side overview

Figure 339: Server front side

Pos. Component

1 CSS module

2 Front panel module

3 Optical disk drive

4

Space for hard disc drives and backup drives (depending on the configuration)

RX300 S7


Appendix

Front panel indicators

Figure 340: Front side: indicators and controls

1 HDD/SSD activity indicator

2 Reset button

3 ID indicator

4 ID button

5 Power-on indicator

6 On/Off button

7 NMI button

8 CSS indicator

9 Temperature error indicator

10 Fan error indicator

11 Global Error indicator

12 Memory error indicator

13 PSU error indicator

14 CPU error indicator

15 HDD/SSD error indicator


RX300

Front panel connectors

Appendix

Figure 341: Front side: indicators and controls

1 Front VGA (optional)

2 Front LAN (optional)

3 Front USB

RX300 S7


Appendix

17.1.2 Server rear

Rear side overview

Figure 342: PRIMERGY RX300 S7 rear

Pos. Component

1 Power supply unit

2 Optional expansion card

3 VGA video connector

4 LAN connectors

5 CSS / Global Error / ID indicators

6 Serial connector

7 USB connectors 1-4

8 Optional expansion card


RX300

17.1.3 Server interior

Appendix

Figure 343: PRIMERGY RX300 S7 interior (example: 2.5-inch HDD model)

Pos. Component

1 Power Supply

2 Processor / CPU heat sink

3 TPM board

4 Fans

5 Front panel module bay

6 HDD / SSD drive bay

7 UFM board

8 Memory slots

RX300 S7


Appendix

17.2 Configuration tables

17.2.1 Hard disk drives / solid state drives mounting order

Please refer to chapter

"Hard disk drives / solid state drives" on page 131 .

17.2.2 Memory board configuration table


"Main memory" on page 263

.

17.2.3 Expansion card configuration table


"Expansion cards and backup units" on page 179

.


RX300

Appendix

17.3 Connectors and indicators

17.3.1 Connectors and indicators on the system board

17.3.1.1 Onboard connectors

Slot 6 PCIe x16

Slot 5 PCIe x16

VGA

Management

LAN

LAN 2

Shared

LAN

LAN

CTRL

Serial 1

USB

1/2

USB

3/4



NC-SI



Intrusion

HDD LED

1

JP1

CPU 2

CPU 2 DIMM 1G

CPU 2 DIMM 2G

CPU 2 DIMM 3G

CPU 2 DIMM 1H

CPU 2 DIMM 2H

CPU 2 DIMM 3H

CPU 2 DIMM 3F

CPU 2 DIMM 2F

CPU 2 DIMM 1F

CPU 2 DIMM 3E

CPU 2 DIMM 2E

CPU 2 DIMM 1E

PWR

PSU Control iRMC

PWR

HDD/ODD

Front VGA

Front LAN M

Front Panel

SMB 1

USB

INT 2

USB

INT 1

CPU 1

Battery

INDICATE

CSS

TPM

CPU 1 DIMM 1A

CPU 1 DIMM 2A

CPU 1 DIMM 3A

CPU 1 DIMM 1B

CPU 1 DIMM 2B

CPU 1 DIMM 3B

CPU 1 DIMM 3D

CPU 1 DIMM 2D

CPU 1 DIMM 1D

CPU 1 DIMM 3C

CPU 1 DIMM 2C

CPU 1 DIMM 1C

FAN 5

FAN 4

FAN 3

FAN 2

BIOS-WP JP8

PCH


USB stick

SKU Key

SMB 4

SATA 1SATA 2

UFM

FAN 1

SAS 1-4

Figure 344: Internal connectors of system board D2939

RX300 S7


Appendix

No. Print

1 PSU Control

2 PWR

Description

Power management connector

ATX power supply connector

3 PWR HDD/ODD

4

5

Front LAN M

Front VGA

Slot for front LAN connector board

Front panel VGA connector

6 Frontpanel USB Front panel connector

7 SMB 1 LSD module

8 USB INT 1

9 USB INT 2

10 TPM

11 FAN1 - FAN5

12 UFM

13 SATA 2

14 SATA 1

15 SMB 4

USB connector

USB connector

Connector for Trusted Platform Module (TPM)

FAN connectors

Connector for USB Flash Module (UFM)

SATA 2 connector

SATA 1 connector

16 SAS 1-4

SATA MLC connector for 3.5-inch HDD configurations


RX300

Appendix

17.3.1.2 Onboard settings

Slot 6 PCIe x16

Slot 5 PCIe x16

VGA

Management

LAN

LAN 2

Shared

LAN

LAN

CTRL

Serial 1

USB

1/2

USB

3/4



NC-SI



Intrusion

HDD LED

1

JP1

CPU 2

CPU 2 DIMM 1G

CPU 2 DIMM 2G

CPU 2 DIMM 3G

CPU 2 DIMM 1H

CPU 2 DIMM 2H

CPU 2 DIMM 3H

CPU 2 DIMM 3F

CPU 2 DIMM 2F

CPU 2 DIMM 1F

CPU 2 DIMM 3E

CPU 2 DIMM 2E

CPU 2 DIMM 1E

PWR

PSU Control iRMC

PWR

HDD/ODD

Front VGA

Front LAN M

Front Panel

SMB 1

USB

INT 2

USB

INT 1

CPU 1

Battery

INDICATE

CSS

TPM

CPU 1 DIMM 1A

CPU 1 DIMM 2A

CPU 1 DIMM 3A

CPU 1 DIMM 1B

CPU 1 DIMM 2B

CPU 1 DIMM 3B

CPU 1 DIMM 3D

CPU 1 DIMM 2D

CPU 1 DIMM 1D

CPU 1 DIMM 3C

CPU 1 DIMM 2C

CPU 1 DIMM 1C

FAN 5

FAN 4

FAN 3

FAN 2

BIOS-WP JP8

PCH


USB stick

SKU Key

SATA 1SATA 2

SMB 4

UFM

FAN 1

SAS 1-4

Figure 345: Onboard settings on system board D2939

RX300 S7


Appendix

Setting Status

1

2

3

JP1

BIOS-

WP

JP8

Password

Skip/Recovery

BIOS

Flash Write

Protect

Flash Security

Disable

Description

Default: Password delete and

Recovery BIOS options disabled

PWD SKIP: Password delete enabled

This jumper setting will permanently delete the current

BIOS password and apply default

BIOS settings.

RCVR: Recovery BIOS enabled

Default

Flash Write Protect enabled

Default

Flash security disabled


RX300

Appendix

17.3.1.3 Onboard indicators and controls

F

Slot 6 PCIe x16

Slot 5 PCIe x16

VGA

Management

LAN

LAN 2

A

Shared

LAN

C

B

LAN

CTRL

H

G

H

Serial 1

USB

1/2

USB

3/4

F



NC-SI



Intrusion

HDD LED

1

JP1

CPU 2

CPU 2 DIMM 1G

CPU 2 DIMM 2G

CPU 2 DIMM 3G

CPU 2 DIMM 1H

CPU 2 DIMM 2H

CPU 2 DIMM 3H

CPU 2 DIMM 3F

CPU 2 DIMM 2F

CPU 2 DIMM 1F

CPU 2 DIMM 3E

CPU 2 DIMM 2E

CPU 2 DIMM 1E

BIOS-WP

F

K

I

PWR

PSU Control

L

PWR

HDD/ODD

Front VGA

Front LAN M

Front Panel

SMB 1

P

Battery

INDICATE

CSS

USB

INT 2

USB

INT 1

/ iRMC

M

N

TPM

FAN 5

O

CPU 1 DIMM 1A

CPU 1 DIMM 2A

CPU 1 DIMM 3A

CPU 1 DIMM 1B

CPU 1 DIMM 2B

CPU 1 DIMM 3B

FAN 4

O

H

O

CPU 1

CPU 1 DIMM 3D

CPU 1 DIMM 2D

CPU 1 DIMM 1D

CPU 1 DIMM 3C

CPU 1 DIMM 2C

CPU 1 DIMM 1C

G

H

FAN 3

FAN 2

O

JP8

PCH


USB stick

SKU Key

SMB 4

SATA 1SATA 2

UFM

FAN 1

SAS 1-4

O

Figure 346: Onboard indicators and Indicate CSS button

No. Description

1 Indicate CSS button

RX300 S7


Appendix

Using the Indicate CSS button

Ê

Shut down and power off the server.

Ê

Disconnect the AC power cord from the system.

I

It is mandatory to disconnect power cords in order to use the Indicate

CSS functionality.

Ê

Press the Indicate CSS button (1) to highlight defective components.

Component LEDs

I

LEDs A, B and C are visible from the outside on the server rear. All other

LEDs are only visible if the server cover has been opened. In order to access memory LEDs (D), the system fan module needs to be removed.


A

B

Identification

CSS

(Customer Self

Service) blue on

Description

server has been highlighted using the ID button on the front panel for easy identification blue flashing server has been highlighted using IRMC

(AVR) when local VGA off for easy identification no critical event (CSS component) off yellow on prefailure detected (CSS component) yellow flashing

CSS component failure off no critical event (non CSS component)

C

F

G

GEL

(Global Error

LED)

Controller

CPU orange on prefailure detected (non CSS component) non CSS component failure

Possible reasons: orange flashing

– sensors report overheating

– sensor is defective

– CPU error

– software reports an error orange on controller faulty orange on CPU faulty


RX300


H

Memory module orange on

I

PS CTRL OK green on

Description

memory module faulty power supply OK

K

PS CTRL Error orange on powe supply error

L

Main power green on voltage ok

M

Standby power yellow on voltage ok

N

O

iRMC

Fans green flashing iRMC S3 ok orange on Fan faulty

P

Battery orange on battery faulty

17.3.2 Connectors and indicators on the I/O panel

17.3.2.1 I/O panel connectors

Appendix

Figure 347: PRIMERGY RX300 S7 rear

1 Video connector (blue) 4 Shared LAN connector (LAN 1)

2 Management LAN connector 5 Serial connector COM1(turquoise)

3 Standard LAN connector (LAN 2) 6 4 USB connectors (black)

Depending on BIOS settings, the shared LAN connector may also be used as a management LAN connector. For further information, please refer to the

"D2939 BIOS Setup Utility for PRIMERGY RX300 S7" reference manual.

RX300 S7


Appendix

The serial connector COM1 can be used as default interface or to communicate with the iRMC S3.

I

The chipset offers two integrated USB 2.0 Rate Matching Hubs (RMHs). that enable lower power requirements and manages the transition of the communication data rate from the high speed of the host controller to the lower speed of USB full speed / low speed devices.

17.3.2.2 I/O panel indicators

Figure 348: I/O panel indicators


1

LAN link/transfer green on off

Description

LAN connection established no LAN connection green flashing data transfer in progress yellow on traffic a transfer rate of 1 Gbit/s

2 LAN speed green on off traffic a transfer rate of 100 Mbit/s traffic a transfer rate of 10 Mbit/s


RX300

Appendix


3


CSS indicator

ID indicator off orange on

Description

no critical event (non CSS component) prefailure detected (non CSS component) orange flashing yellow flashing non CSS component failure off no critical event (CSS component) yellow on prefailure detected (CSS component)

CSS component failure blue on server has been highlighted using

ServerView Operations Manager or the

ID button on the front panel for easy identification

I

Note on the onboard LAN controller

The system board is equipped with a Gigabit Ethernet Controller that supports transfer rates of 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s and 1 Gbit/s.

The separate management LAN connector is used as a management interface (iRMC S3) and is prepared for operation with the Remote

Management. Optionally LAN connector 1 can also be used for iRMC S3 server management.

RX300 S7


Appendix

17.3.3 Connectors and indicators on the front panel

17.3.3.1 Front panel connectors

Figure 349: Front panel connectors

Pos. Component

1 optional VGA connector

2 optional front LAN connector

3 front USB connectors


RX300

17.3.3.2 Front panel controls and indicators

Appendix

Figure 350: Front panel controls and indicators

Local diagnostic indicators

Pos. Indicator

15

HDD error indicator

13

PSU error indicator

9

14

12

Temperature error indicator

CPU error indicator

Memory error indicator

Status

orange on orange on orange on

Description

HDD / SSD, SAS / SATA backplane or

RAID controller failure detected

Hot-plug PSU module failure detected

I

Only available in redundant PSU configurations.

Operating temperature levels above permitted limits orange on CPU prefailure event detected orange on Memory module failure detected

RX300 S7


Appendix

Pos. Indicator

10

Fan error indicator

Status Description

orange on Fan prefailure or failure event detected

I

In addition to local dignostic indicators, CSS or Global Error LEDs indicate, if the defective component is a customer replaceable unit or if a service technician needs to be dispatched to replace the part.

Status indicators

Pos. Indicator

3

Identification indicator

8 CSS indicator

11

1

5


HDD / SSD activity indicator

Power-on indicator

Status Description

blue on orange on server has been highlighted using

ServerView Operations Manager or the

ID button on the front panel for easy identification no critical event (CSS component) off yellow on prefailure detected (CSS component) yellow flashing

CSS component failure off no critical event (non CSS component) prefailure detected (non CSS component) orange flashing non CSS component failure green flashing data access in progress green on orange on server is switched on and running server is switched off, but mains voltage is present (standby mode)


RX300

Appendix

Buttons

Pos. Button

4 ID button

2 Reset button

7 NMI button

6 On / Off button

Function

This button highlights the ID indicator on the front and

I/O panels for easy server identification.

This button is used to reboot the system. It can be pressed using the end of a paper clip.

V

CAUTION!

Risk of data loss!

This button is used to troubleshoot software and device driver errors It can be pressed using the end of a paper clip.

V

CAUTION!

Use this button only if directed to do so by qualified certified maintenance personnel!

This button is used to switch the server on or off.

I

If the system is running an ACPI-compliant operating system, the pressing the On / Off button will performs a graceful shutdown.

RX300 S7


Appendix

17.4 Minimum startup configuration


If the server does not start up or other problems occur, it may be necessary to take the system down to its most basic configuration in order to isolate the defective component.

The minimum startup configuration consists of the following components and cables:

Component

System board

CPU with CPU heat sink

1 memory module

Front panel module

Power supply unit

Notes

no TPM, UFM or expansion cards installed installed in DIMM slot 1A without connected front LAN module

Table 11: Minimum startup configuration - components

Cable

Front panel cable

Power cable

Notes

Table 12: Minimum startup configuration - cables

Ê


Ê


Ê

Take the system down to its minimum startup configuration.

Ê


Ê

Connect a keyboard, mouse and display to the server.

Ê

"Switching on the server" on page 79


RX300

Appendix

V

CAUTION!

Since the fan module is not included in the minimum startup configuration, the server must be shut down immediately after the diagnostic process is complete (POST phase has been passed).

The minimum startup configuration must be used exclusively for diagnostic purposes by maintenance personnel, never in daily operation!

RX300 S7


Appendix


RX300

PRIMERGY RX300 S7 Server Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

Comments… Suggestions… Corrections…

Certified documentation according to DIN EN ISO 9001:2008

Copyright and Trademarks

Before reading this manual

Contents

Version history

1 Introduction

1.1

Where to find which information?

1.2

Notational conventions

2 Before you start

2.1

Classification of procedures

2.1.1

Customer Replaceable Units (CRU)

2.1.2

Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)

2.1.3

Field Replaceable Units (FRU)

2.2

Average task duration

2.3

Tools you need at hand

2.4

Documents you need at hand

3 Important information

3.1

Safety instructions

3.2

ENERGY STAR

3.3

CE conformity

3.4

FCC Class A Compliance Statement

3.5

Environmental protection

4 Basic hardware procedures

4.1

Using diagnostics information

4.1.1

Locating the defective server

4.1.2

Determining the error class

4.1.3

Locating the defective component

4.2

Opening the rack door

4.3

Shutting down the server

4.4

Disconnecting power cords

4.5

Extending/removing the server from the rack

4.5.1

Preliminary steps

4.5.2

Extending the server out of the rack

4.5.3

Removing the server from the rack

4.6

Opening the server

4.6.1

Removing the server cover

4.6.2

Removing the air duct

4.6.3

Installing the air duct

4.7

Closing the server

4.7.1

Mounting the server cover

4.8

Mounting the server in the rack

4.8.1

Seating the server on the rack rails

4.8.2

Sliding the server into the rack

4.9